<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=192.168.0.0%2F16</id>
	<title>Tatters of the King - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=192.168.0.0%2F16"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php/Special:Contributions/192.168.0.0/16"/>
	<updated>2026-10-24T19:49:49Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.46.2</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Aftermath&amp;diff=3510</id>
		<title>Aftermath</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Aftermath&amp;diff=3510"/>
		<updated>2006-10-07T11:46:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locating [[Francesca]] quite easily, [[Nathaniel Browne]] asks her to return to England with him, a request to which she happily agrees. The two elope soon after [[Andrew Saunders]]&#039; memorial service which is held near the end of April, 1931, and spend some time in America, where Browne finally meets with Robert Chambers. The two return to England and settle in the west country. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meanwhile, [[Captain Withers]] marries the widow Morrison in a church ceremony on the 14th of December, 1930. Over the next few years, he and Browne meet on occasion to reminisce, and to wonder if, and when, the [[King in Yellow]]&#039;s prescence on Earth might be felt. When war stirs in Europe, each wonders whether this is the King&#039;s influence, and whether armies united under the banner of the yellow sign might soon be marching across the continent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brownes&#039; first child arrives stillborn in the February of 1932, and despite trying, they have difficulty conceiving again. Nathaniel continues his writing. Despite never turning in an adequate sequel to [[Tatters of the King]], he continues to write horror stories. His book &amp;quot;The Frozen Tomb&amp;quot; about an ancient horror buried beneath the Antarctic Ice who&#039;s dreams invade those of researchers in the southern continent, enjoys some popularity, especially after the tragic Starkweather-Moore expedition of 1933 makes the news. Eventually a living son, Andrew Frederick Browne, is born on the 18th of February, 1937 although the birth is difficult and Francesca almost perishes in childbirth. After this, Nathaniel&#039;s stories become, like Chambers before him, light romances. Fortunately, in wartime England, these prove, although critically reviled, massively successful. Indeed one, &amp;quot;Love At Sea&amp;quot;, which tells the tale of an author meeting a beautiful woman on an ocean liner to India, is eventually made into a film starring Alec Guinness in the 1950s. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1941, during the blitz, disaster strikes. Visiting relatives in the outskirts of London, Francesca is killed when a building, weakened by nazi munitions, collapses. Andrew, who was with Francesca at the time, is also assumed dead. In fact Andrew, traumatized by the event, wanders, dazed, into London where he is eventually picked up by the police and put into an orphanage. Utterly traumatized, the boy does not speak for the next 3 years.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel&#039;s writing becomes, again, dark. His stories are now haunted, disjointed things, full of faustian bargains. Nathaniel begins planning an archaeological excavation in the Nepalese highlands, to be funded from his own fortune. On the morning of November 1st, 1947, Nathaniel is found dead in his study, shot through the head. A revolver lays in his right hand. Neighbors say that the previous evening there was a large car outside the house, possibly an army staff car. A heated argument took place in which the word &#039;Carcosa&#039; was mentioned, and also something about a &#039;king&#039;. Finding no trace of any foul play in the house, however, and finding copious supplies of opium both in the house and in Nathaniel&#039;s blood, the case is deemed suicide. To everyone&#039;s surprise, Nathaniel has left everything to his second cousin in Australia. Unable to contact her or arrange for the dispersal of the estate, the house is simply locked up and left. The police do not notice the burned remains of several maps, notes and books in the fireplace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:darkp.jpg|right|200px|thumb|Nathaniel&#039;s Last Work]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers, by now a Colonel and a veteran of two World Wars, attended the funeral, then went back to a life that had long left behind the horrors of Carcosa and Leng, except occasionally in dreams. As the only true survivor of the entire incredible affair he never really knew to what extent they could be said to have triumphed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the years after Nathaniel&#039;s death, his books experience an incredible upsurge in popularity due, in no small part, to the mysterious circumstances surrounding his demise. His publishers arrange for his last work in progress to be finished by a leading author of the day. The work turns out to be a magnum opus, a fiction of great emotional power which borrows heavily, although the readers don&#039;t know it, from the real adventure of Nathaniel and his friends. Scholars debate the work for decades to come.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1965, under hypnosis while undergoing psychotherapy (by sheer coincidence, at the Bartlett Institute In London), the now adult Andrew Browne, now known as Alan Tate, remembers his name and his family. To his surprise he finds that, as the only surviving member of the Browne family, he has gained entitlement to his fathers house and belongings. He takes up residence in the house, which has become much overgrown and run down. While cleaning up the fireplace, he discovers a loose brick. behind the brick is a journal, embossed with a strange yellow sign...&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Aftermath&amp;diff=3486</id>
		<title>Aftermath</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Aftermath&amp;diff=3486"/>
		<updated>2006-10-04T08:37:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Locating [[Francesca]] quite easily, [[Nathaniel Browne]] asks her to return to England with him, a request to which she happily agrees. The two elope soon after [[Andrew Saunders]]&#039; memorial service which is held near the end of April, 1931, and spend some time in America, where Browne finally meets with Robert Chambers. The two return to England and settle in the west country. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meanwhile, [[Captain Withers]] marries the widow Morrison in a church ceremony on the 14th of December, 1930. Over the next few years, he and Browne meet on occasion to reminisce, and to wonder if, and when, the [[King in Yellow]]&#039;s prescence on Earth might be felt. When war stirs in Europe, each wonders whether this is the King&#039;s influence, and whether armies marching under the banner of the yellow sign might soon be marching across the continent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Brownes&#039; first child arrives stillborn in the February of 1932, and despite trying, they have difficulty conceiving again. Nathaniel continues his writing. Despite never turning in an adequate sequel to [[Tatters of the King]], he continues to write horror stories. His book &amp;quot;The Frozen Tomb&amp;quot; about an ancient horror buried beneath the Antarctic Ice who&#039;s dreams invade those of researchers in the southern continent, enjoys some popularity, especially after the tragic Starkweather-Moore expedition of 1933 makes the news. Eventually a living son, Andrew Frederick Browne, is born on the 18th of February, 1937 although the birth is difficult and Francesca almost perishes in childbirth. After this, Nathaniel&#039;s stories become, like Chambers before him, light romances. Fortunately, in wartime England, these prove, although critically reviled, massively successful. Indeed one, &amp;quot;Love At Sea&amp;quot;, which tells the tale of an author meeting a beautiful woman on an ocean liner to India, is eventually made into a film starring Alec Guinness in the 1950s. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1941, during the blitz, disaster strikes. Visiting relatives in the outskirts of London, Francesca is killed when a building, weakened by nazi munitions, collapses. Andrew, who was with Francesca at the time, is also assumed dead. In fact Andrew, traumatized by the event, wanders, dazed, into London where he is eventually picked up by the police and put into an orphanage. Utterly traumatized, the boy does not speak for the next 3 years.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel&#039;s writing become, again, dark. They are now haunted, disjointed things, full of faustian bargains. Nathaniel begins planning an archaeological excavation in the Nepalese highlands, to be funded from his own fortune. On the morning of November 1st, 1947, Nathaniel is found dead in his study, shot through the head. A revolver lays in his right hand. Neighbors say that the previous evening there was a large car outside the house, possibly an army staff car. A heated argument took place in which the word &#039;Carcosa&#039; was mentioned, and also something about a &#039;king&#039;. Finding no trace of any foul play in the house, however, and finding copious supplies of opium both in the house and in Nathaniel&#039;s blood, the case is deemed suicide. To everyone&#039;s surprise, Nathaniel has left everything to his second cousin in Australia. Unable to contact her or arrange for the dispersal of the estate, the house is simply locked up and left. The police do not notice the burned remains of several maps, notes and books in the fireplace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In 1965, under hypnosis while undergoing psychotherapy, the now adult Andrew Browne, now known as Alan Tate, remembers his name and his family. To his surprise he finds that, as the only surviving member of the Browne family, he has gained entitlement to his fathers house and belongings. He takes up residence in the house, which has become much overgrown and run down. While cleaning up the fireplace, he discovers a loose brick. behind the brick is a journal, embossed with a strange yellow sign...&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Malcolm_Quarrie&amp;diff=3400</id>
		<title>Malcolm Quarrie</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Malcolm_Quarrie&amp;diff=3400"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T12:13:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Quarrie&amp;#039;s Death */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Rumours of Quarrie ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Malcolm.jpg|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Malcolm Quarrie was one of the men who both [[Delia Morrison]] and [[Vincent Tuck]] referred to as spending a great deal of time with [[Alexander Roby]] in 1925. His other associates being [[Lawrence Bacon]], [[Edwards]] and [[Coombes]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referred to by [[Alexander Roby]] during his monologue to [[Dr Bartlett]], the following is stated:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Roby does not know where Quarrie is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He may be attempting to &#039;bring&#039; [[the King in Yellow]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- It appears Quarrie disagreed with Roby and [[Edwards]] on one or more issues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Quarrie believes that [[the King in Yellow]] has called himself [[the White Acolyte]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roby also asks Bartlett to pass on a stanza of poetry to Quarrie as a warning or piece of advice:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;             The stars that burn their charcoal death,&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;             Shrink back, they feel the hoary breath,&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;             Of he who ransoms great Carcosa.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;             He flees where queen and prophet met,&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;             Where twin suns fall but never set,&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;             Escapes the tomb of lost Carcosa.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
                &lt;br /&gt;
According to [[Vincent Tuck]] who saw him in 1925, Quarrie was about 35, upper middle class with black hair and a slim build. A scientist, he worked at the Royal Society in Piccadilly and lived alone at 12 Moreton Street in Westminster.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Malcolm&#039;s wife, [[Hillary Quarrie]], apparently lives at [[Nug&#039;s Farm]] in the West Country. According to the letters found at Quarrie&#039;s former address he was estranged from Hillary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Wilfred Gresty]]&#039;s letters connected Hillary to a man called Atkinson, and Gresty&#039;s ambitions. The full story of The Qauarrie family&#039;s involvement with the [[Goatswood]] cult can be found on [[Hillary Quarrie]]&#039;s page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aleister Crowley believed that Quarrie had gone to Italy in search of [[The Brothers of the Yellow Sign]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Evidence of Quarrie ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/23_Malcolm_Quarries_First_Letter.pdf first letter] gave his reasons for breaking with [[Bacon]] and his circle and told of his planned &#039;[[Pilgrimage of Grace]]&#039; to bring [[Hastur]] to Earth. It gives his location as [[Milan]] and says he can be reached by letter through the Thomas Cook offices in that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/24_Malcolm_Quarries_Second_Letter.pdf second letter], far more recent, explains that Malcolm is about to set out on his &#039;Pilgrimage&#039; and gives specific contact details through [[Thomas Villers]] at the shipping office of [[Giuseppe Colombo]] in Milan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Milan, [[Thomas Villiers]] revealed that he and Quarrie had travelled to Italy together, having broken with the [[Bacon]] group after [[Springer Mound]] and met [[The Brothers of the Yellow Sign]] in Rome, prior to joining a splinter group of the Brotherhood in Milan, with Colombo and professor [[Roberto Anzalone]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie and Anzalone formed an expedition, ostensibly to Tibet, but whose true destination appears to be in the Nepalese kingdom of [[Mustang]]. Quarrie left for the Himalaya some weeks ago and according to his letter to his wife expected to encounter [[the King in Yellow]] at some time after December&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Meeting Quarrie ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie was finally encountered on the other side of the gate from [[Drakmar]] to [[Leng]]. There is was that surrounded by their [[Tcho-Tcho]] captors the investigators finally caught up with their ‘quarry’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished to see Westerners, Quarrie at first assumed they were fellow Pilgrims, but it soon became obvious that these men had come all this way to stop him, not aid him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They told Quarrie of their dealings with [[Roby]], [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] and of course of their meeting with [[Hillary Quarrie]], and her message to her husband. They also gave Quarrie the warning that Roby told them to give him. He gave a wry smile and said this was all ‘a test of faith’.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie trekked across Leng with the investigators and their Tcho-Tcho escorts, and from there spent 2 days wandering the dark halls of [[the Upper House]] with them – all this time they tried to persuade him that what he wished to do was dangerous, but his religious fervour was inpenetrable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quarrie&#039;s Death ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually, while Quarrie sat explaining his credo to [[Nathaniel Browne]], who was finding it more convincing with every passing minute, [[Umberto]] walked up to Quarrie and, without warning, put a bullet through his head.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Almost as soon as Quarrie was dead, Browne realised that Malcolm had been attempting to sway him by the same sorcerous means used on Major Delnegro. With Quarrie gone, the power of his arguments quickly faded.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3399</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3399"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T12:10:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* The Plaza of the King */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:anza.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Anzalone Transformed]]&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a drooling, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched whistling overwhelms their senses. The time spent travelling through the gate seems simultaneously mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but, as Browne insists on not crossing, they instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair. Saunders makes a mental note to tell his friend Professor Tolkien about this place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne, who leaps to his feet, the yellow-signed knife in his hand, and advances on Umberto, before suddenly coming to his senses and dropping the knife. There is a tense standoff as Browne argues that his mind is clear and urges Umberto to surrender his weapon. He realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb, though the influence has retreated with Quarrie&#039;s death.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of Umberto&#039;s act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they do not challenge him on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigators look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The King in Yellow]] has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3398</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3398"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T12:09:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* The Upper House */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:anza.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Anzalone Transformed]]&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a drooling, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched whistling overwhelms their senses. The time spent travelling through the gate seems simultaneously mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but, as Browne insists on not crossing, they instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair. Saunders makes a mental note to tell his friend Professor Tolkien about this place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne, who leaps to his feet, the yellow-signed knife in his hand, and advances on Umberto, before suddenly coming to his senses and dropping the knife. There is a tense standoff as Browne argues that his mind is clear and urges Umberto to surrender his weapon. He realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb, though the influence has retreated with Quarrie&#039;s death.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of Umberto&#039;s act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they do not challenge him on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigators look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3397</id>
		<title>Session 15</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_15&amp;diff=3397"/>
		<updated>2006-09-26T12:02:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Friday February 17th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 25th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
--&#039;&#039;continued&#039;&#039;--&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:drakmarnew.jpg|right|thumb|500px|The red cliffs of Drakmar]]&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators stand at the threshold of [[Drakmar]], in kingdom of [[Mustang]], the final destination of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s [[Pilgrimage of Grace]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A quick count shows there are somewhere between 50 and 100 caves spread across the cliffs at heights between 30 and 150 feet about the valley floor. The investigators cross the valley for a closer look. En route they locate the remnants of the Italian expedition’s campsite and nearby a large flat stone stained with a large amount of blood. Though the blood is not fresh, nor is it more than a few weeks old.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Following a trail of blood spots [[Withers]] locates a fresh cairn under which it is assumed a body has been buried. The investigators discuss disturbing the dead, but decide against it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] and [[Saunders]] climb up to the nearest cave. It is worn smooth as if by centuries of feet and leads to a small chamber whose walls are covered in thousands of tally marks in groups of nine. In the centre of the chamber is a small pile of bones which appear to be mix of birds and human finger bones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] thinks he catches a glimpse of something from the corner of his eye and sees a stone falling down the cliff. He climbs to where he thinks it came from and discovers a cave with a narrow crawlspace heading back into the cliff. He thinks better of crawling inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several more caves are explored before night falls. Saunders finds a small pit filled with strips of dried human scalps. Other caves are connected by internal tunnels, but there is no sign of life or of fresh activity, and no further sign of [[Quarrie]] or his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators camp for the night in the first cave they had explored. During the night both [[Browne]] and [[Umberto]] have dreams of bestial savagery which feel like the intrusions of an alien intelligence, but which have none of the terrible beauty of Hastur. Each of them awakens, heart pounding.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 17th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As dawn approaches, Umberto is on watch, and it is he who first hears a disturbing human sobbing sound coming from a cave mouth high above the campsite. Taking his gun and a torch, Umberto climbs to investigate, waking nobody else.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When Saunders wakes up, Umberto is gone. He wakes the others and they hear the sobbing sound. Taking their packs and their weapons they clamber up towards the noise and enter the cave from which it issues. In leads into a tunnel that twists through the rock until a pale glow can be seen in the distance. The sobbing, oddly, is fading, but as it fades the deep slow heartbeat sound heard by [[Browne]] the day before is clearly audible to all.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nervously the party edges forward as the passage opens up into a large chamber dominated by an archway on the far side which is lit up with a pearly glow. Beyond the arch can be seen the silhouette of a vast immobile bulk, a great squatting buddha with the head of an elephant, over the surface of which smaller creatures scurry. Despite the lack of any clarity in the image it is very disturbing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two other entrances into the chamber and it is through one of these that [[Umberto]] now emerges, being held at spearpoint by a hideous black-skinned humanoid. The creature is a mass of naked muscle, but only 4ft tall. Its bald head is mis-shapen, its features inhuman. Before anyone can react a dozen more of the creatures emerge from the other entrance, and from behind the investigators can be heard many more, who have clearly entered the tunnel that they are using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:anza.jpg|200px|thumb|right|Anzalone Transformed]]&lt;br /&gt;
The creatures do not speak, but from the archway emerges a man - or rather what remains of a man. Despite his hideous injuries and bizarre deformities, this appears to be [[Anzalone]]. Naked, with his eyes put out, his mouth a drooling, bloody, toothless hole and most horrible of all his nose and ears stretched, ragged and moving on their own in sick parody of the trunk and ears of an elephant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] raise their guns and fire, putting an end to Anzalone&#039;s obvious misery. The black creatures, clearly having never encountered firearms, swarm over the investigators. Saunders fails to get a shot off, but both Withers and Browne shoot a couple dead before they are disarmed. The creatures show no anger or distress at the deaths of some of their number, and do no violence to the investigators beyond disarming them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The apparent chief of the creatures goes to Anzalone&#039;s corpse and examines it in apparent annoyance, then gives an order in a language that sounds vaguely Tibetan. Umberto is dragged over towards the gate and his hand held out. The chief uses a knife to cut his hand open and then paints a crude Yellow Sign on the wall beside the gate using Umberto&#039;s bloody palm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The light from the gate changes to a pale cold blue, and the shadow of [[Chaugnar Faughn]] (as Umberto will shortly identify it to his companions) disappears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The helpless investigators are forced through the gate, where a horrible high pitched whistling overwhelms their senses. The time spent travelling through the gate seems simultaneously mere seconds and endless aeons. As the sound fades the investigators find themselves standing in the middle of an endless icy plain under a starlit sky. They are still surrounded by the black humanoids, and there in front of them, with his own retinue of the creatures, stands [[Malcolm Quarrie]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leng ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;NB: Whilst in Leng the investigators&#039; watches refuse to keep time in any consistent manner. Within a few hours nobody has any idea how long they have been there, their very sense of time has become unreliable.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Astonished at the appearance of Westerners, Quarrie is full of questions. He soon discovers the gist of their purpose and how it was they came to be here. He is unsurprised, and not unhappy, to discover that [[Bacon]] and [[Edwards]] are dead, and pleased to find that [[Roby]] reached Carcosa and that his wife and daughter are well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He answers the investigators&#039; questions, explaing how the black humanoids, who he calls the [[Tcho-Tcho]] worship the elephant god [[Chaugnar Faughn]] and have waited centuries for [[the White Acolyte]] believing that he will bring Chaugnar Faughn to Earth. In truth it was [[the King in Yellow]] who tricked them long ago into believing this, for it is the King that awaits the Acolyte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains how [[Carlo Schippone]], maddened by the dreams of the elephant god, slew Major Delnegro in the night and fled and how [[Anzalone]] was taken by the Tcho-Tcho to be Chaugnar Faughn&#039;s companion as had been promised to them long ago. Quarrie regrets the deaths of the rest of his expedition, but believes their sacrifice worthwhile.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He explains that one of the five people here now must be the [[White Acolyte]], though obviously he hopes that he himself will be the one. The Tcho-Tcho are ready to leave now - they are to go to &#039;[[the Upper House]]&#039;, the place where the King will come down from [[Aldebaran]] to [[Leng]]. The task of the Acolyte will be to lead him from there to Earth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quarrie is erudite, charming and has a pleasant nature, but he is absolutely immovable in his resolve to guide the King to Earth. Bereft of any way back to their homes, the investigators agree to travel with Quarrie, as yet undecided on how to deal with him. As the strange party of humans and Tcho-Tcho starts its trek across the cold wastes of Leng, the investigators start to work on trying to convince Quarrie that what he aims to do is misguided and terribly dangerous. He sees this as a test of faith and sets about trying to convince the others, especially [[Browne]] of the rightness of his cause.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Several hours into the trek across the featureless waste a great flying creature appears in the dstance. As it gets closer its true size and hideous appearance becomes obvious. Even though a couple of the investigators still carry revolvers (the Tcho-Tcho didn&#039;t recognise those as weapons and only took longarms) they decide against drawing them now, as the Tcho-Tcho would likely seize them. The monster screeches and dives at the group. Most dive to the ground, but Withers tries to seize a spear from a Tcho-Tcho and as they grapple for the weapon the great alien bird snatches the Tcho-Tcho and flies up with its prey. there is a crunch, a spray of blood and the Tcho-Tcho&#039;s severed head falls, striking Withers on the way down.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Amazing,&amp;quot; says Quarrie, &amp;quot;A &#039;&#039;shantak&#039;&#039; bird. this truly must be Leng!&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tcho-Tcho chief picks up the severed head and as the group moves on, begins to chew lumps off of it. The humans decide not to look.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek continues for hours, and the investigators and Quarrie are exhausted. Saunders is suffering especially badly, having not yet recovered from the trip to Drakmar. Browne realises that they are heading towards a bright star close to the horizon. he points it out to Quarrie and they agree it must be Albebaran. &amp;quot;I feel like I have been travelling toward it for the last year and a half&amp;quot; sighs Browne, &amp;quot;Much longer for me, my friend, much longer...&amp;quot; replies Quarrie. As they continue, it is Browne who first notices that Aldebaran has dipped behind some sort of a structure on the horizon. [[The Upper House]] is, at last, in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Upper House ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The building is unspectacular. A square structure about 250 yards along a side and 20 yards high with sloping walls and a flat roof. Built of white stone and with a single wide doorway in the middle of the wall that the investigators are approaching.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A ring of plain obelisks surrounds the Upper House at a distance of a few hundred feet and  the[[Tcho-Tcho]] do not cross the line of this circle. Quarrie, excited that his destination lies ahead, hurries forward and the investigators follow at once lest Quarrie get far enough ahead to lose them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The five men enter the structure. The doorway gapes open into a wide corridor whose floor slopes slightly downward and whose walls are painted with images of alien beings in vast cyclopean cities. When they look back, a few tens of feet into the building, the investigators see that instead of the exit, all that lies behind them is an endless stretch of corridor. It is clear that the normal laws and space and time do not apply in this place. [[Browne]] hurries to keep up with [[Quarrie]] while [[Saunders]] and [[Umberto]] whisper to each other conspiratorialy. A faint piping sound can be heard far ahead, and Quarrie heads toward it without hesitation. The others follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Upper House proves to be vast and complex. For hours the investigators and Quarrie wander great halls and vaults with only the light of their flashlights to piece the black. They encounter a great stairway into the earth but give up on its descent after 10 minutes.  They decide to always try to move upwards where possible. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They reach a great chasm crossed by a narrow bridge, but instead choose to climb the wall behind them by way of a winding stair, only to find that the chamber at the top leads back to the very same bridge and very same stair. Saunders makes a mental note to tell his friend Professor Tolkien about this place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They camp twice to get rest and to eat, and it is on the second of these stops that Umberto takes drastic action. He wakes to see Quarrie deep in conversation with Browne, who is finding Malcolm&#039;s arguments more and more convincing. Remembering [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s account of the use of sorcery to turn the mind of major Delnegro, Umberto realises that Quarrie is more dangerous than he looks. He makes the decision to take an action long delayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Umberto stands up, casually walks over to Quarrie and without warning puts a bullet through his brain. Blood and brain matter sprays over Browne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Despite the shock of this act, the other three had all thought it may be necessary, and though they find Umberto&#039;s methods shocking they understand why he has done it. Browne&#039;s mind almost immediately clears and he realises that Quarrie had been successful in doing that which Crowley had failed to do at Marx&#039;s tomb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators move on, leaving Quarrie&#039;s body behind, unburied. Soon they hear the pipes again, and start to feel they are making progress. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventually they pass through a chamber they have already seen, but this time there is a stairway up that was not there before. They have been wandering through the Upper House for an indeterminate time, but it could well be 2 or even 3 days. They are exhausted, but this discovery brings new hope.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Plaza of the King ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The stairs lead up to a broad open plaza under a starlit sky. Aldebaran, low in the sky, reflects from the polished stones. The piping has stopped, but upon the ground is found a set of pipes carved with the likeness of several [[Byakhee]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the far side of the plaza stand a pair of ornate pillars, with a great stone lectern next to them. As the investigators look around for a clue about what to do next a figure appears between the pillars. There is no arrival, he is just there, and somehow he always was.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a figure like a very tall, very thin man in flowing, tattered yellow robes that move in a non-existent breeze. There is no face visible within his hood. he does not speak but everyone knows who, or what, he is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The King in Yellow has stepped down from Aldebaran.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Nathaniel_Browne%27s_Secrets&amp;diff=3276</id>
		<title>Nathaniel Browne&#039;s Secrets</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Nathaniel_Browne%27s_Secrets&amp;diff=3276"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:15:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Nathaniel&#039;s friend, Jean-Paul Etienne, is a user and supplier of certain mind-expanding substances (including opium). Nathaniel has partaken of these on occassion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel does not, as he appears to, live off any inheritance. In fact his parents left him very little. Instead he writes gossip columns for a London paper under a pseudonym (John Parker). He sends his stories to the newspaper&#039;s editor, George Baker, and recives payments via a post-office box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the sucess of Nathaniel&#039;s &#039;Tatters of the King&#039; anthology, he has given up writing the columns. Unfortunately, his increasing use of halucinogenic drugs to substitute for the inspiration brought on by last years events threatens to drive Nathaniel back to poverty...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel&#039;s opium use is irregular and not overly frequent and his addiction to the substance is more psycological than physical.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3275</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3275"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:13:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Saturday February 4th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks out. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage, falling to the floor where [[Browne]] swings a foot at the man. The kick is ineffectual and the rioter sinks his teeth into Browne&#039;s ankle, driving him away and allowing the madman to leap to his feet and grab [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver finally puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Some say a man showed them &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Siva proves most capable and nothing more important than a case of spoons has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to negotiate around some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon until Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses. This intrigues [[Saunders]] who takes many photographs and notes, the villagers in these parts rocognise the investigators as westerners, but this deep into Nepal, none of them cares much.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]], suffering from acute acrophobia, proves quite incapable of crossing it until he requests and is given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3274</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3274"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:09:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Saturday February 4th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks out. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage, falling to the floor where [[Browne]] swings a foot at the man. The kick is ineffectual and the rioter sinks his teeth into Browne&#039;s ankle, driving him away and allowing the madman to leap to his feet and grab [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver finally puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Some say a man showed them &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Siva proves most capable and nothing more important than a case of spoons has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to negotiate around some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon until Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses. This intrigues [[Saunders]] who takes many photographs and notes, the villagers in these parts rocognise the investigators as westerners, but this deep into Nepal, none of them cares much.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]], suffering from acute acrophobia, proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3273</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3273"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:09:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Friday February 3rd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks out. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage, falling to the floor where [[Browne]] swings a foot at the man. The kick is ineffectual and the rioter sinks his teeth into Browne&#039;s ankle, driving him away and allowing the madman to leap to his feet and grab [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver finally puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Some say a man showed them &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Siva proves most capable and nothing more important than a case of spoons has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to negotiate around some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon until Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses. This intrigues [[Saunders]] who takes many photographs and notes, the villagers in these parts rocognise the investigators as westerners, but this deep into Nepal, none of them cares much.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3272</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3272"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:06:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Monday January 30th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks out. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage, falling to the floor where [[Browne]] swings a foot at the man. The kick is ineffectual and the rioter sinks his teeth into Browne&#039;s ankle, driving him away and allowing the madman to leap to his feet and grab [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver finally puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Some say a man showed them &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Siva proves most capable and nothing more important than a case of spoons has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to negotiate around some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon until Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3271</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3271"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:05:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Wednesday January 25th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks out. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage, falling to the floor where [[Browne]] swings a foot at the man. The kick is ineffectual and the rioter sinks his teeth into Browne&#039;s ankle, driving him away and allowing the madman to leap to his feet and grab [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver finally puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Some say a man showed them &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Siva proves most capable and nothing more important than a case of spoons has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3270</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3270"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:01:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Monday January 23rd 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his offer of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3269</id>
		<title>Session 14</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_14&amp;diff=3269"/>
		<updated>2006-09-19T13:00:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Saturday January 21st 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 18th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 19th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have just 2 days left in Bombay to prepare fully for the long journey North to Mustang. [[Browne]] spends as much time as possible with Francesca, in between equipping for the trek across Nepal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 20th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A farewell dinner is held at the [[Tullis]] home. Francesca and Patricia do not attend, as Patricia doesn&#039;t wish to be around [[Withers]] at the moment. Mr Tullis proves a somewhat curmudgeonly, blustering man. The typical &#039;&#039;sahib&#039;&#039;, but the meal is fine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 21st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train to the Northern city of Benares leaves first thing in the morning. All 4 investigators board with the Reverend [[Gore]], who offers to show them around Jabalpur if they wish to break their journey at that city.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators&#039; carriage proves to be occupied by a large Indian family, and only after the conductor has been payed some &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is the problem solved. The train pulls out of Bombay and begins to head North. the investigators are sharing a 6-bed carriage with The Reverend Gore. [[Siva]] insists on more modest accomodation for himself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Gore continues to show his great knowledge of India in conversation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 22nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. The land is flat, arid and featureless, punctuated by small poverty-stricken villages characterised by communal reservoirs called &#039;&#039;tanks&#039;&#039;, straving dogs and wild monkeys.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the larger towns the platforms throng with passengers and well-wishers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 23rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Gore]] disembarks in Jabalpur. the investigators turn down his other of a short stay with him due to the difficulties inherent in getting all of their supplies off the train.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigaors are now alone and able to discuss their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 24th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train continues across India. As the train travels North the climate gets steadily warmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 25th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the train slowly edges its way through the suburbs of the city of Benares it passes a crowd standing near to the tracks. The crowd are chanting angrily and some are gesturing to the train. [[Siva]] says they are chanting &#039;The King Steps Down&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly violence breaks own. Rocks are thrown at the train and one smashes a window and hits [[Withers]] on the head as he rumnmages for his gun. The rioters attack the train en masse  just as the train grinds to a complete halt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers fires at a man trying to enter the train through the broken window but misses as [[Umberto]] tries to stop him from killing anyone. In the confusion the maddened rioter enters the carriage and grabs [[Saunders]] by the throat. A crack on the back of the skull from Withers&#039; revolver puts him out.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other rioters try to enter the carriage but are driven off just as the train starts to move again. Troops who were travelling at the far end of the train soon arrive to restore order. Apparently those rioters who boarded the train have now clamed now and don&#039;t seem to know what happened. Sonme say a man showed then &#039;the yellow mark&#039; and they became enraged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train moves into the city centre and the invetsigators disembark. Their attacker is taken away by the soldiers. Siva arranges the movement of the exopedition&#039;s gear from the train to the platform for the connecting train to the Nepalese border. Despite the chaos of the station Sivaproves most capable and it appears that nothing important has been lost.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within 2 hours the investiagtors are on a second, older train, heading North.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday January 26th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train heads North to the border. This train is less comfortable than the Bombay service and the service is less efficient. Siva proves the difference between a pleasant journey and a tiresome one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 27th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The train arrives at the railhead at Nautanwa. The expedition&#039;s gear is removed from the train and placed in storage until a guide and bearers can be found. Yet more &#039;&#039;baksheesh&#039;&#039; is paid to ensure nothing goes missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 28th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the town a boarding house frequented by Nepalese is located, and with the aid of [[Siva]] a merchant called [[Jigme Rinzing]] is found who is willing to guide the party as far North as Gori Padi where he will find then another guide for the Northern part of Nepal. Rinzing is not planning on leaving for a couple of days, however, which will make for a frustrating delay in this out of the way town.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 29th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in final preparation for the trek. Fresh food is purchased, water-bottles are filled and Nepalese outer garb procured to ease the crossing on the border. At Rinzing&#039;s suggestion facial hair is shaved off - very few Nepalese have any - and tea is rubbed into faces to brown them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 30th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The trek to Drakmar - day 1.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Browne]] manages to handle some last minute concerns about the amount of baggage the Nepalese bearers are expected to carry, the expedition sets off for the border crossing. [[Siva]] agrees to continue with the party, as a translator is required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Deciding on subterfuge rather than a difficult detour through woods in search of a gap in the border fence, the party almost passes by the customs officers without comment, but [[Saunders]]&#039; pale Scottish complexion raises suspecions and it looks as if the British officer drinking tea in the guardpost may be called upon upon Saunders produces a thick wad of rupees to persuade the customs man to look the other way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nepal is entered. Crossing the border the party pass through thickly wooded country and stops the night in an inn at the village of Butwal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 31st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Today&#039;s trek follows a gorge lined with terraced farms and ends at Tansing, a village notable for its fine metalwork.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 1st 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Everyone feels fit and healthy as the day begins, but by mid afternoon the tricky terrain and worsening weather makes for heavy going. It is necessary to camp outside tonight, as no village is nearby. Dreams of the King in Yellow continue to disturb the investigators&#039; sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 2nd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 4 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a tricky morning&#039;s travel the expedition reaches the lakeside town of Pokhara, which supports a street bazaar. while exploring the bazaar the investigators meet a trader who sold cooking utensils to another group of Europeans some months earlier. through him they trace the Italian expedition&#039;s former guide, Yangser Chumpo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yangser needs to be paid to talk, but when he does he shares the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
-  There were four white men, one spoke Nepalese and Tibetan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- They were going to Drakmar, above the Monastery at [[Te]], near the village of Kag.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- That is not a good place, as the &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; have fallen and the black ghosts inhabit the caves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- When he realised that was their destination, Yangser Chumpo told them they must leave, and when they did not, he left them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- He is sure the ghosts must have taken them&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 3rd 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ground rises steadily as the investigators trek past several small villages  until the reach a place called Rigme, where effigies of a goddess called &#039;&#039;Dhaulitya&#039;&#039; adorn the houses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 4th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 6 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 5000ft above sea level the party encounters a narrow rope bridge. [[Nathaniel Browne]] proves quite incapable of crossing it until given opium by [[Jigme Rinzing]]. When a second such bridge is reached later, Browne gets a second dose. The others worry that Browne seems used to the evil poppy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day ends at the market town of Hille on the main trade route to Tibet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 7&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By the end of the day the party are 8000ft above sea level and have reached the village of Gora Pani,  - [[Jigme Rinzing]]&#039;s final destination, as his home is nearby.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is just as well that the expedition will be delayed for a day while new help is found, as altitude sickness is beginning to effect the Europeans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 8 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent in Gora Pani. [[Jigme Rinzing]] locates a new guide, a Tibetan called [[Tsewan Pemba]] and hires a new group of 6 bearers, a smaller number than were hitherto being used, which requires some of the heavier items to be traded in the town for food and other necessities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s rest enables everyone to recover from the altitude sickness of the previous day. From here, the Annapurna range fills the Northern horizon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 9&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:kali.jpg|right|thumb|400px|The Kali Gandaki]]&lt;br /&gt;
Today the Kali Gandaki river gorge is reached, a most impressive sight. the day ends at the village of Gasa, where the women threshing grain on the flat roofs of the houses creates whirlwinds of chaff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 10&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A day of slow progress, featuring more rope bridges and more opium for [[Browne]]. in Tukatcha, the first ethnically Tibetan village reached, the bearers have to be replaced, but the new ones are willing to go all the way to Kag. The investigators have decided not to talk of Drakmar&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 11&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now travelling 9000ft above sea level, the expedition passes the treeline today and reaches a land of barren rock and wind-eroded caves. Red, black and white-painted &#039;&#039;chortens&#039;&#039; abound and prayer flags blow in the wind like the tatters of the king in yellow. This truly is the Himalaya.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Altitude sickness begins the threaten again, and [[Saunders]] is feeling the effects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday February 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 12 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expedition, growing weary from its long, high trek has a short day&#039;s travel. Reaching the village of Jomoson, where the investigators see their first yaks, the espedition rests as [[Tsewan Pemba]] wishes to meet with a man here about the possible marriage of his young daughter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While exploring the town [[Saunders]] finds that amongst the five buddhas in the local temple is one that is quite clearly the King in Yellow. those painted white the statue disturbingly seems to take on a yellow tinge when looked at for more than a few seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The monk in the temple say that the God in Yellow is a god of the sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday February 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 13&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 10,000 feet, with the effects of altitude quite noticable to all, the expedition follows the Kali Gandaki to the town of Kag. Kag looks like a fortress perched on a cliff, its houses built together, surrounding a central square.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the monastery at Kag, where Pemba has arranged for the Europeans to sleep for the night, a monk gives [[Umberto]] a book which proves to be [[Carlo Schippone]]&#039;s diary ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Part 1],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Part 2],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/29_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_3.pdf Part 3],[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_1.pdf Translation Part 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/30_Carlo_Schippones_Diary_2.pdf Translation Part 2]), which was brought here from the monastery at Te many weeks ago.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Umberto]] reads the diary and tells the tale of the Italian expedition - the use of sorcery to cloud the mind of Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] - encounters with creatures called &#039;the Tsotowa&#039; - the religious fervour slowly changing to fear, terror and madness - and in the end Schippone&#039;s sribbled ravings about &#039;Miri Nigri&#039;, &#039;The White Acolyte&#039;, murder, blood and monsters. It ends with the phrase &#039;What have I done?&#039; scrawled over and over again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That night, as the investigators try to sleep they hear their guide and bearers in animated discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday February 12th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 14 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day&#039;s trek reaches the deepest river gorge on earth - 18,000 feet deep, an awesome sight. The party has to leave the river and climb to 11,000 feet. It is bitterly cold. As darkness falls the small village of Tayen is reached.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In tayan the locals say that there was a European at the monastery up at [[Te]]. The boy who came to the village  from food for the lama told of him, and brought his book down to be taken the Kag in search of someone who could read it. According to the boy, the stranger came from drakmar, where the Guru Rimpoche slew the Ogress Balmo and stained the cliffs with her blood. The ghosts in the caves took his companions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The boy has not come down for many weeks. the villagers of Tayen think that ghosts, or even Balmo herself, have taken the monks too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday February 13th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 15&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This morning [[Tsewan Pemba]] comes to Withers and says he and his men will go no further. Ghosts and demons lie ahead, and no sane man would walk into that. The bearers are paid off, and they leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Siva]] now approaches the investigators and says that he is too frightened to go any further, and he begs his friends not to go themselves. Siva reveals he has children, and he won&#039;t leave them without a father.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He agrees instead to stay at Tayen and guard the expedition&#039;s supplies. he has found a local who wishes to go to the monastery and ask the monks to help his sick son. this man will lead the investigators up there tomorrow if the really must go. Since [[Saunders]] still feels ill from mountain sickness the enforced day of rest is a blessing in disguise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday February 14th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 16&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Up the mountain to Te with a local guide. Schippone attacks and is killed by Withers. guide is shot. Into monstery. Bodies found. That evening Siva arrives.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday February 15th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 17 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mustang.jpg|right|400px|thumb|Mustang]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;On towards Drakmar, Siva stays with injured man at Te. Sleep on the mountain. Dreams reach their climaxes&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday February 16th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Day 18 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Arrival at Drakmar&#039;&#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Thomas_Villers&amp;diff=3079</id>
		<title>Thomas Villers</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Thomas_Villers&amp;diff=3079"/>
		<updated>2006-09-08T23:10:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#redirect [[Thomas Villiers]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3076</id>
		<title>Session 12</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3076"/>
		<updated>2006-09-08T13:21:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Thursday, January 11th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 4th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Steve Irwin - R.I.P.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 31st 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett_Tombtstone.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wimbledon Cemetary, the funeral of Doctor Frederick [[Bartlett]]. In the face of some cold stares from Bartlett&#039;s family, the investigators retire to a nearby pub and make plans to travel to Nepal. It is decided to book passage on the next available ship, which will be &#039;[[The Viceroy of India]]&#039;, a new P&amp;amp;O liner which leaves Southampton on Friday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is agreed that to avoid the crossing of the Bay of Biscay, never pleasant at this time of year, the investigators will travel by train to Marseilles and meet the boat there on Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators leave England and head to France, taking a train south to the port of Marseilles, where they buy the gear they feel they need for the journey - walking shoes, packs, alpine rations and survival gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All three investigators experience disturbing dreams containing themes and imagery from the Hastur mythos. All feel the influence of [[the King in Yellow]] is growing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators board [[The Viceroy of India]] for the 11 day voyage to [[Bombay]]. Over the next week and a half they will spend a lot of time with their dining companions on Table 8, who they meet that lunchtime (with the exception of Mr Thomas, who does not appear until dinner).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - a diplomat returning to India, who implies that he may be some kind of a spy and clearly has an eye for the ladies and a taste for brandy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - a missionary with the British Bible Society, on his way to continue spreading the Word in the interior of India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - the matronly wife of the Cultural attache in Bombay, returning from visiting her sick sister and very much the &#039;mother hen&#039; of the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - a pudgy, bespectacled man. A minor civil servant taking up a new post in India, Stephen always has his head in a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - a pretty, vivacious typist on her way to visit relatives and see the sub-continent. She knows [[Nathaniel Browne]]&#039;s work and is especially happy to meet him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Francesca&#039;s quieter, less glamorous friend and travelling companion. from a monied background, she busies herself in voluntary work. As Franscesca&#039;s attention has been monopolised by Browne, Julian Knight immediately latches on to Patricia.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: At this point, Julian Knight is being played by [[Marcus Gustafsson]] and the other players think that Julian is his new character in the campaign.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators get on well immediately with most of the diners, with the exception of Mr. Knight who almost immediately inspires dislike.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The afternoon in mostly taken up in trying Skeet shooting, a pursuit at which Mr. Knight proves himself quite inept, while the others attempt to pick up pointers off the obviously more experienced Withers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner that evening, Francesca has attached herself to Browne as is hanging on his every word, while poor Patricia finds herself the object of Knight&#039;s attentions, something that is making her increasingly uncomfortable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During dinner Saunders sees a swarthy looking man looking into the dining room and is sure he&#039;s seen him before, though he cannot place him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the meal, when it is time for the ship&#039;s orchestra to strike up, [[Withers]] notices Knight is ordering a drink and chivalrously steps in, inviting Patricia to be his dance partner for the evening. Thus paired up, Withers and Browne go to the dancefloor, Knight to the bar and [[Andrew Saunders]] wanders off on his own for the evening. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Francesca returns to Nathaniel&#039;s stateroom where she discovers a copy of [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play amongst Nathaniel&#039;s books. Remembering the dedication from &#039;[[Tatters of the King]]&#039; she asks if she can borrow it. Browne agrees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Past midnight, Withers hears Saunders return to his cabin. He wonders quite where his friend has been and, remebering Saunder&#039;s mention of the swarthy stranger, decides to investigate. Gun in hand, he knocks at the door of Saunder&#039;s state room and is answered by a flustered Saunders who, nevertheless, ensures him that all is well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams on across the Mediterranean. A game of deck quoits takes place, and [[Henrietta Tullis]] presses the investigators into competing against the reverend [[Gore]]. Withers and Browne encounter [[Francesca Nicholson]] and [[Patricia Berry]] once more, and Patricia is impressed to see Withers win handily, despite his protestations that he has never played before.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the game, [[Saunders]] sees the swarthy stranger once more, but still cannot place him, or catch up with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] arrives and tries once more to ingratiate himself with Patricia. while [[Browne]] continues to get on with Francesca like a house on fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While the ladies spend the afternoon in a painting class, Browne tries his hand at violin lessons, Saunders stalks the deck searching for (and failing to spot) the mysterious stranger and the others wile away the time in various pursuits.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner, Saunders is constantly looking out for the stranger, and the others are starting to get a little worried about him. During the meal, Mrs Tullis and Rev. Gore box Knight in to stop him from bothering Patricia, and Withers finds himself once more spending time with young Miss Berry, whose reticence and shyness is slowly fading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After dinner, as the orchestra strikes up, Withers notices Saunders sneaking off, makes up some quickly invented excuse to extricate himself from his dance with Miss Berry and trails him. Saunders passes into an area signposted as for &#039;Staff only&#039;; Withers (after a brief pause for an internal debate about going into a place that is out of bounds) follows and runs into a lascar seaman. Wither&#039;s makes to push through regardless of the lascar&#039;s protestations, but the raised voices alert Saunders who emerges from a nearby door with an unreadable look upon his face. Withers sees the name &amp;quot;Head Steward Wilkins&amp;quot; on the door from which Saunders has emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders tells Withers that Wilkins is an old friend and refuses to say any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back in the ballroom, Knight, having escaped the attentions of Rev. Gore and Mrs Tullis, has managed to get Patricia to dance with him, unprotected by Francesca and Nathaniel who have gone for a walk together. When Knight goes for a drink, Withers rescues her and when Knight returns, Mrs Tullis asks him to dance. Knight drains his brandy glass and accepts his fate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers attempts to question Browne about Saunders&#039; behaviour. Browne, guessing what is going on better than Withers, attempts inexpertly to deflect his attention, but succeeds only in piquing his curiousity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams into Port Said. Many passengers disembark to explore the &#039;&#039;souk&#039;&#039; and experience some exotic culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] spends his time ashore with [[Francesca Nicholson]]. It is obvious to everyone that romance is blossoming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back aboard, dinner that evening has an Egyptian theme. Over dinner, [[Julian Knight]] shows another side to his personality, taking a great interest in the investigators and their travels. Soon this becomes a suspicious amount of interest, as if he is trying to find out something specific. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the middle of dinner a note is hand-delivered to [[Withers]]. The note requests a meeting at the ship&#039;s bow at 10 o&#039;clock that evening, and is signed &#039;[[Aldones]]&#039;. Withers is to come alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of dinner, to the great surprise of the investigators, Knight does not attempt to get Patricia to dance, but simply stands up and leaves. The investigators discuss the mysterious note and decide that Withers will go, but Saunders will follow and watch from the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bow, nobody turns up. Withers waits for only a few minutes, then convinced that this is a transparent plot of Knight&#039;s decides to return to the ballroom where, at about 5 to 10, Knight had turned up and immediately started to work once more on Patricia&#039;s affections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Withers starts to leave a lascar turns up with another note, requesting a 15 minute delay prior to the meeting. Withers does not buy this and hurries back to the ballroom where, with a bit of help from Francessca, he once more rescues Patricia from Knight. Patricia is starting to greatly like Withers and tells Francesca who in turn tells Nathaniel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders hangs back near the bow and sees a shadowy figure arrive at 10.15, wait for a minute then slip away. Saunders attempts to follow, but quickly loses the trail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Suez.jpg|right|200px|thumb|The Suez Canal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent travelling through the Suez Canal, a fascinating and unique maritime experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At lunch [[Henrietta Tullis]] mentions the traditional end of voyage show at which each table puts on a small act. [[Francesca Nicholson]] happily suggests a performance of part of &#039;[[Carcosa: or the Queen and the Stranger]]&#039;, but both [[Withers]] and [[Saunders]] veto this, citing emotional reasons around the death of their &#039;friend&#039; [[Talbot Estus]]. Instead it is agreed that the table will put on a [[recitation]] of Gilbert and Sullivan songs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders has a reasonable singing voice, as do Francesca, Mrs Tullis (unsurprising as this is a hobby for her), and the Reverend Gore.&lt;br /&gt;
The big surprise is Mr Thomas, who turns out to have an excellent baritone once coaxed from his initial reticence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The others are cobbled into a larger chorus where their lesser vocal talents are better merged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At dinner, Mr Knight fails more misrablely than ever at trying to pump the investigators for information and in trying to chat up Patricia, and decides instead to drown his sorrows at the bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Absolutely nothing sinister happens this evening.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday, January 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Deck_Cricket.jpg|387px|right|thumb|Saunders and Browne at bat]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This afternoon the traditional Port vs Starboard cricket match takes place. All of the investigators take part and perform variously well (and Julian Knight seems to playing as though he is drunk, even hitting the first mate with an ill-timed throw), but it is [[Andrew Saunders]] who shines, very oddly for a Scot. Despite a couple of mistakes in the outfield his oustanding batting an bowling talents end up winning the match virtually single-handedly. Saunders is carried to the bar on the shoulders of his team-mates in triumph!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returning to his stateroom, [[Browne]] is shocked to find that he has been burgled, [[The Turner Codex]] is gone, along with the note from [[Villiers]]&#039; studio, whcih was tucked between the pages. Browne reveals his suspicion tbat [[Julian Knight]] is involved, citing his recent behaviour and the mysterious notes. Knight is questioned by the Chief Purser and instantly cracks under the slightest pressure, revealing his involvement with a mysterious Italian who offered to get [[Withers]] out of his way in return for all he could learn about the investigators&#039; reasons for travel to India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knight also reveals that he was told that a note left for &#039;Aldones&#039; at the telegraph office could be used to make contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is decided to draft such a note suggesting a midnight meeting somewhere on the ship, and that whoever picks up the note should be identified or even followed if possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The note is so drafted, delivered and picked up. The man who picks up the note is identified as [[Umberto]] Zavaroni from stateroom 217.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening no dancing follows dinner. Knight stays well away from Patricia and  the ladies retire to play cards to allow the men to carry out their business.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and a couple of burly crewmen head to the bow while the chief purser and Browne let themselves into the room opposite Zavaroni&#039;s and wait.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 11.45 a man appears at the door to 217, knocks and speaks in Italian. Watching through the peephole, Browne sees him draw a stilleto as Zavaroni&#039;s door starts to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne bursts into the corridor shouting a warning, Zavaroni opens the door. The assassin strikes, glancing a blow off of his target&#039;s money-belt. Browne steps out, swings a well placed fist and smashes the attacker&#039;s nose back into his face knocking him out cold. The stilleto falls to the ground. A Yellow Sign is embossed on its handle. Browne quickly pockets the knife.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;At this point, [[Marcus Gustafsson]] starts to play [[Umberto]] to everyone else&#039;s surprise. It is now revealed that Knight was never his player character, but a mere piece of misdirection, and instead he will be playing Umberto.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is soon revealed that the now unconscious assassin burgled Browne&#039;s cabin and that Umberto has long been a thorn in the side of [[the Brothers of the Yellow Sign]]. He says that &#039;Zavaroni&#039; is a fake name, but that they can call him &#039;Umberto&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other investigators arrive in time to hear Umberto&#039;s tale of following their footsteps for months after his investigation of the activities of the Brotherhood  caused him to become aware of their group. A former Vatican investigator, he takes the threat of [[Hastur]] very seriously and hopes they can be allies. It turns out that it was Umberto who, using the name &#039;[[Aldones]]&#039;, enlisted Mr Knight to find out more about the investigators, trying to verify that these were indeed the group he had been trailing for so long.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and Browne look at each other, in their eyes the unasked question - &#039;Can we trust this man?&#039;. Browne notices that Umberto wears the symbol of [[The Order of the Sword of St. Jerome]], the Vatican&#039;s (surely mythical?) occult investigation arm. After a long discussion it is established that with the amount that Umberto seems to already know, it would be fairly pointless for the others to disassociate from them as he would probably just follow them anyway.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3022</id>
		<title>Session 12</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3022"/>
		<updated>2006-09-07T10:45:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Sunday January 7th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 4th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Steve Irwin - R.I.P.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 31st 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett_Tombtstone.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wimbledon Cemetary, the funeral of Doctor Frederick [[Bartlett]]. In the face of some cold stares from Bartlett&#039;s family, the investigators retire to a nearby pub and make plans to travel to Nepal. It is decided to book passage on the next available ship, which will be &#039;[[The Viceroy of India]]&#039;, a new P&amp;amp;O liner which leaves Southampton on Friday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is agreed that to avoid the crossing of the Bay of Biscay, never pleasant at this time of year, the investigators will travel by train to Marseilles and meet the boat there on Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators leave England and head to France, taking a train south to the port of Marseilles, where they buy the gear they feel they need for the journey - walking shoes, packs, alpine rations and survival gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All three investigators experience disturbing dreams containing themes and imagery from the Hastur mythos. All feel the influence of [[the King in Yellow]] is growing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators board [[The Viceroy of India]] for the 11 day voyage to [[Bombay]]. Over the next week and a half they will spend a lot of time with their dining companions on Table 8, who they meet that lunchtime (with the exception of Mr Thomas, who does not appear until dinner).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - a diplomat returning to India, who implies that he may be some kind of a spy and clearly has an eye for the ladies and a taste for brandy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - a missionary with the British Bible Society, on his way to continue spreading the Word in the interior of India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - the matronly wife of the Cultural attache in Bombay, returning from visiting her sick sister and very much the &#039;mother hen&#039; of the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - a pudgy, bespectacled man. A minor civil servant taking up a new post in India, Stephen always has his head in a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - a pretty, vivacious typist on her way to visit relatives and see the sub-continent. She knows [[Nathaniel Browne]]&#039;s work and is happy to meet him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Francesca&#039;s quieter, less glamorous friend and travelling companion. from a monied background, she busies herself in voluntary work. Julian Knight immediately latches on to her.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: At this point, Julian Knight is being played by [[Marcus Gustafsson]] and the other players think that Julian is his new character in the campaign.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner that evening, Francesca has attached herself to Browne as is hanging on his every word, while poor Patricia finds herself the object of Knight&#039;s attentions, something that is making her increasingly uncomfortable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During dinner Saunders sees a swarthy looking man looking into the dining room and is sure he&#039;s seen him before, though he cannot place him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the meal, when it is time for the ship&#039;s orchestra to strike up, [[Withers]] notices Knight is ordering a drink and chivalrously steps in, inviting Patricia to be his dance partner for the evening. Thus paired up, Withers and Browne go to the dancefloor, Knight to the bar and [[Andrew Saunders]] wanders off on his own for the evening. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Francesca returns to Nathaniel&#039;s stateroom where she discovers a copy of [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play amongst Nathaniel&#039;s books. Remembering the dedication from &#039;[[Tatters of the King]]&#039; she asks if she can borrow it. Browne agrees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Past midnight, Withers hears Saunders return to his cabin. He wonders quite where his friend has been and, remebering Saunder&#039;s mention of the swarthy stranger, decides to investigate. Gun in hand, he knocks at the door of Saunder&#039;s state room and is answered by a flustered Saunders who, nevertheless, ensures him that all is well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams on across the Mediterranean. A game of deck quoits takes place, and [[Henrietta Tullis]] presses the investigators into competing against the reverend [[Gore]]. Withers and Browne encounter [[Francesca Nicholson]] and [[Patricia Berry]] once more, and Patricia is impressed to see Withers win handily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the game, [[Saunders]] sees the swarthy stranger once more, but still cannot place him, or catch up with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] arrives and tries once more to ingartiate himself with Patricia. while [[Browne]] continues to get on with Francesca like a house on fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner, Saunders is constantly looking out for the stranger, and the others are starting to get a little worried about him. During the meal, Mrs Tullis and the Rev Gore box Knight in to stop him from bothering Patricia, and Withers finds himself once more spending time with young Miss Berry, whose reticence and shyness is slowly fading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After dinner, as the orchestra strikes up, Withers notices Saunders sneaking off, makes up some quickly invented excuse to extricate himself from his dance with Miss Berry and trails him. Saunders passes into an area signposted as for &#039;Staff only&#039;; Withers (after a brief pause for an internal debate about going into a place that is out of bounds) follows and runs into a lascar seaman. The lascar&#039;s raised voice alerts Saunders who emerges from a nearby door with an unreadable look upon his face. Withers sees the name &amp;quot;Head Steward Wilkins&amp;quot; on the door from which Saunders has emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders tells Withers that Wilkins is an old friend and refuses to say any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back in the ballroom, Knight has managed to get Patricia to dance with him, unprotected by Francesca and Nathaniel who have gone for a walk together. When Knight goes for a drink, Withers rescues her and when Knight returns, Mrs Tullis asks him to dance. Knight drains his brandy glass and accepts his fate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams into Port Said. Many passengers disembark to explore the &#039;&#039;souk&#039;&#039; and experience some exotic culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] spends his time ashore with [[Francesca Nicholson]]. It is obvious to everyone that romance is blossoming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back aboard, dinner that evening has an Egyptian theme. Over dinner, [[Julian Knight]] shows another side to his personality, taking a great interest in the investigators and their travels. Soon this becomes a suspicious amount of interest, as if he is trying to find out something specific. The investigators become suspicious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the middle of dinner a note is hand-delivered to [[Withers]]. The note requests a meeting at the ship&#039;s bow at 10 o&#039;clock that evening, and is signed &#039;[[Aldones]]&#039;. Withers is to come alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of dinner, to the great surprise of the investigators, Knight does not attempt to get Patricia to dance, but simply stands up and leaves. The investigators discuss the mysterious note and decide that Withers will go, but Saunders will follow and watch from the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bow, nobody turns up. Withers waits for only a few minutes, then convinced that this is a transparent plot of Knight&#039;s decides to return to the ballroom where, at about 5 to 10, Knight had turned up and immediately started to work once more on Patricia&#039;s affections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Withers starts to leave a lascar turns up with another note, requesting a 15 minute delay prior to the meeting. Withers does not buy this and hurries back to the ballroom where, with a bit of help from Francessca, he once more rescues Patricia from Knight. Patricia is starting to greatly like Withers and tells Francesca who in turn tells Nathaniel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders hangs back near the bow and sees a shadowy figure arrive at 10.15, wait for a minute then slip away. Saunders fails to follow him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Suez.jpg|right|200px|thumb|The Suez Canal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent travelling through the Suez Canal, a fascinating and unique maritime experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At lunch [[Henrietta Tullis]] mentions the traditional end of voyage show at which each table puts on a small act. [[Francesca Nicholson]] happily suggests a performance of part of &#039;Carcosa: or the Queen and the Stranger&#039;, but both [[Withers]] and [[Saunders]] veto this, citing emotional reasons around the death of their &#039;friend&#039; [[Talbot Estus]]. Instead it is agree to put on a recitation of Gilbert and Sullivan songs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday, January 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Deck_Cricket.jpg|387px|right|thumb|Saunders and Browne at bat]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This afternoon the traditional Port vs Starboard indoor cricket match takes place. All of the investigators take part and perform variously well (and Julian Knight seems to playing as though he is drunk), but it is [[Andrew Saunders]] who shines, very oddly for a Scot. Winning the match virtually single-handedly, Saunders is carried to the bar in triumph!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returning to his stateroom, [[Browne]] is shocked to find that he has been burgled, [[The Turner Codex]] is gone. Browne accuses [[Julian Knight]] of involvement, citing his recent behaviour and the mysterious notes. Knight is questioned by the Chief Purser and instantly cracks under the slightest pressure, revealing his involvement with a mysterious Italian who offered to get [[Withers]] out of his way in return for all he could learn about the investigators&#039; reasons for travel to India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knight also reveals that he was told that a note left for &#039;Aldones&#039; at the telegraph office could be used to make contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is decided to draft such a note suggesting a midnight meeting somewhere on the ship, and that whoever picks up the note should be identified or even followed if possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The note is so drafted, delivered and picked up. The man who picks up the note is identified as [[Umberto]] Zavaroni from stateroom 217.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening no dancing follows dinner. Knight stays well away from Patricia and  the ladies retire to play cards to allow the men to carry out their business.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and a couple of burly crewmen head to the bow while the chief purser and Browne let themselves into the room opposite Zavaroni&#039;s and wait.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 11.45 a man appears at the door to 217, knocks and speaks in Italian. Watching through the peephole, Browne sees him draw a stilleto as Zavaroni&#039;s door starts to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne bursts into the corridor shouting a warning, Zavaroni opens the door. The assassin strikes, glancing a blow off of his target&#039;s money-belt. Browne steps out, swings a well placed fist and smashes the attacker&#039;s nose back into his face knocking him out cold. The stilleto falls to the ground. A Yellow Sign is embossed on its handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;At this point, [[Marcus Gustafsson]] starts to play [[Umberto]] to everyone else&#039;s surprise. It is now revealed that Knight was never his player character, but a mere piece of misdirection, and instead he will be playing Umberto.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is soon revealed that the now unconscious assassin burgled Browne&#039;s cabin and that Umberto has long been a thorn in the side of [[the Brothers of the Yellow Sign]]. He says that &#039;Zavaroni&#039; is a fake name, but that they can call him &#039;Umberto&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other investigators arrive in time to hear Umberto&#039;s tale of following their footsteps for months after his investigation of the activities of the Brotherhood  caused him to become aware of their group. A former Vatican investigator, he takes the threat of [[Hastur]] very seriously and hopes they can be allies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and Browne look at each other, in their eyes the unasked question - &#039;Can we trust this man?&#039;. Browne notices that Umberto wears the symbol of [[The Order of the Sword of St. Jerome]], the Vatican&#039;s (surely mythical?) occult investigation arm.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3021</id>
		<title>Session 12</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3021"/>
		<updated>2006-09-07T10:41:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Saturday January 6th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 4th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Steve Irwin - R.I.P.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 31st 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett_Tombtstone.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wimbledon Cemetary, the funeral of Doctor Frederick [[Bartlett]]. In the face of some cold stares from Bartlett&#039;s family, the investigators retire to a nearby pub and make plans to travel to Nepal. It is decided to book passage on the next available ship, which will be &#039;[[The Viceroy of India]]&#039;, a new P&amp;amp;O liner which leaves Southampton on Friday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is agreed that to avoid the crossing of the Bay of Biscay, never pleasant at this time of year, the investigators will travel by train to Marseilles and meet the boat there on Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators leave England and head to France, taking a train south to the port of Marseilles, where they buy the gear they feel they need for the journey - walking shoes, packs, alpine rations and survival gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All three investigators experience disturbing dreams containing themes and imagery from the Hastur mythos. All feel the influence of [[the King in Yellow]] is growing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators board [[The Viceroy of India]] for the 11 day voyage to [[Bombay]]. Over the next week and a half they will spend a lot of time with their dining companions on Table 8, who they meet that lunchtime (with the exception of Mr Thomas, who does not appear until dinner).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - a diplomat returning to India, who implies that he may be some kind of a spy and clearly has an eye for the ladies and a taste for brandy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - a missionary with the British Bible Society, on his way to continue spreading the Word in the interior of India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - the matronly wife of the Cultural attache in Bombay, returning from visiting her sick sister and very much the &#039;mother hen&#039; of the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - a pudgy, bespectacled man. A minor civil servant taking up a new post in India, Stephen always has his head in a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - a pretty, vivacious typist on her way to visit relatives and see the sub-continent. She knows [[Nathaniel Browne]]&#039;s work and is happy to meet him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Francesca&#039;s quieter, less glamorous friend and travelling companion. from a monied background, she busies herself in voluntary work. Julian Knight immediately latches on to her.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: At this point, Julian Knight is being played by [[Marcus Gustafsson]] and the other players think that Julian is his new character in the campaign.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner that evening, Francesca has attached herself to Browne as is hanging on his every word, while poor Patricia finds herself the object of Knight&#039;s attentions, something that is making her increasingly uncomfortable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During dinner Saunders sees a swarthy looking man looking into the dining room and was sure he&#039;d seen him before, but could not place him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the meal, when it is time for the ship&#039;s orchestra to strike up, [[Withers]] notices Knight is ordering a drink and chivalrously steps in, inviting Patricia to be his dance partner for the evening. Thus paired up, Withers and Browne go to the dancefloor, Knight to the bar and [[Andrew Saunders]] wanders off on his own for the evening. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Francesca returns to Nathaniel&#039;s stateroom where she discovers a copy of [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play amongst Nathaniel&#039;s books. Remembering the dedication from &#039;[[Tatters of the King]]&#039; she asks if she can borrow it. Browne agrees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late that night, Withers hears Saunders return to his cabin. He wonders quite where his friend has been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams on across the Mediterranean. A game of deck quoits takes place, and [[Henrietta Tullis]] presses the investigators into competing against the reverend [[Gore]]. Withers and Browne encounter [[Francesca Nicholson]] and [[Patricia Berry]] once more, and Patricia is impressed to see Withers win handily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the game, [[Saunders]] sees the swarthy stranger once more, but still cannot place him, or catch up with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] arrives and tries once more to ingartiate himself with Patricia. while [[Browne]] continues to get on with Francesca like a house on fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner, Saunders is constantly looking out for the stranger, and the others are starting to get a little worried about him. During the meal, Mrs Tullis and the Rev Gore box Knight in to stop him from bothering Patricia, and Withers finds himself once more spending time with young Miss Berry, whose reticence and shyness is slowly fading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After dinner, as the orchestra strikes up, Withers notices Saunders sneaking off, makes up some quickly invented excuse to extricate himself from his dance with Miss Berry and trails him. Saunders passes into an area signposted as for &#039;Staff only&#039;; Withers (after a brief pause for an internal debate about going into a place that is out of bounds) follows and runs into a lascar seaman. The lascar&#039;s raised voice alerts Saunders who emerges from a nearby door with an unreadable look upon his face. Withers sees the name &amp;quot;Head Steward Wilkins&amp;quot; on the door from which Saunders has emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders tells Withers that Wilkins is an old friend and refuses to say any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back in the ballroom, Knight has managed to get Patricia to dance with him, unprotected by Francesca and Nathaniel who have gone for a walk together. When Knight goes for a drink, Withers rescues her and when Knight returns, Mrs Tullis asks him to dance. Knight drains his brandy glass and accepts his fate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams into Port Said. Many passengers disembark to explore the &#039;&#039;souk&#039;&#039; and experience some exotic culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] spends his time ashore with [[Francesca Nicholson]]. It is obvious to everyone that romance is blossoming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back aboard, dinner that evening has an Egyptian theme. Over dinner, [[Julian Knight]] shows another side to his personality, taking a great interest in the investigators and their travels. Soon this becomes a suspicious amount of interest, as if he is trying to find out something specific. The investigators become suspicious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the middle of dinner a note is hand-delivered to [[Withers]]. The note requests a meeting at the ship&#039;s bow at 10 o&#039;clock that evening, and is signed &#039;[[Aldones]]&#039;. Withers is to come alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of dinner, to the great surprise of the investigators, Knight does not attempt to get Patricia to dance, but simply stands up and leaves. The investigators discuss the mysterious note and decide that Withers will go, but Saunders will follow and watch from the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bow, nobody turns up. Withers waits for only a few minutes, then convinced that this is a transparent plot of Knight&#039;s decides to return to the ballroom where, at about 5 to 10, Knight had turned up and immediately started to work once more on Patricia&#039;s affections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Withers starts to leave a lascar turns up with another note, requesting a 15 minute delay prior to the meeting. Withers does not buy this and hurries back to the ballroom where, with a bit of help from Francessca, he once more rescues Patricia from Knight. Patricia is starting to greatly like Withers and tells Francesca who in turn tells Nathaniel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders hangs back near the bow and sees a shadowy figure arrive at 10.15, wait for a minute then slip away. Saunders fails to follow him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Suez.jpg|right|200px|thumb|The Suez Canal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent travelling through the Suez Canal, a fascinating and unique maritime experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At lunch [[Henrietta Tullis]] mentions the traditional end of voyage show at which each table puts on a small act. [[Francesca Nicholson]] happily suggests a performance of part of &#039;Carcosa: or the Queen and the Stranger&#039;, but both [[Withers]] and [[Saunders]] veto this, citing emotional reasons around the death of their &#039;friend&#039; [[Talbot Estus]]. Instead it is agree to put on a recitation of Gilbert and Sullivan songs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday, January 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Deck_Cricket.jpg|387px|right|thumb|Saunders and Browne at bat]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This afternoon the traditional Port vs Starboard indoor cricket match takes place. All of the investigators take part and perform variously well (and Julian Knight seems to playing as though he is drunk), but it is [[Andrew Saunders]] who shines, very oddly for a Scot. Winning the match virtually single-handedly, Saunders is carried to the bar in triumph!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returning to his stateroom, [[Browne]] is shocked to find that he has been burgled, [[The Turner Codex]] is gone. Browne accuses [[Julian Knight]] of involvement, citing his recent behaviour and the mysterious notes. Knight is questioned by the Chief Purser and instantly cracks under the slightest pressure, revealing his involvement with a mysterious Italian who offered to get [[Withers]] out of his way in return for all he could learn about the investigators&#039; reasons for travel to India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knight also reveals that he was told that a note left for &#039;Aldones&#039; at the telegraph office could be used to make contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is decided to draft such a note suggesting a midnight meeting somewhere on the ship, and that whoever picks up the note should be identified or even followed if possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The note is so drafted, delivered and picked up. The man who picks up the note is identified as [[Umberto]] Zavaroni from stateroom 217.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening no dancing follows dinner. Knight stays well away from Patricia and  the ladies retire to play cards to allow the men to carry out their business.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and a couple of burly crewmen head to the bow while the chief purser and Browne let themselves into the room opposite Zavaroni&#039;s and wait.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 11.45 a man appears at the door to 217, knocks and speaks in Italian. Watching through the peephole, Browne sees him draw a stilleto as Zavaroni&#039;s door starts to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne bursts into the corridor shouting a warning, Zavaroni opens the door. The assassin strikes, glancing a blow off of his target&#039;s money-belt. Browne steps out, swings a well placed fist and smashes the attacker&#039;s nose back into his face knocking him out cold. The stilleto falls to the ground. A Yellow Sign is embossed on its handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;At this point, [[Marcus Gustafsson]] starts to play [[Umberto]] to everyone else&#039;s surprise. It is now revealed that Knight was never his player character, but a mere piece of misdirection, and instead he will be playing Umberto.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is soon revealed that the now unconscious assassin burgled Browne&#039;s cabin and that Umberto has long been a thorn in the side of [[the Brothers of the Yellow Sign]]. He says that &#039;Zavaroni&#039; is a fake name, but that they can call him &#039;Umberto&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other investigators arrive in time to hear Umberto&#039;s tale of following their footsteps for months after his investigation of the activities of the Brotherhood  caused him to become aware of their group. A former Vatican investigator, he takes the threat of [[Hastur]] very seriously and hopes they can be allies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and Browne look at each other, in their eyes the unasked question - &#039;Can we trust this man?&#039;. Browne notices that Umberto wears the symbol of [[The Order of the Sword of St. Jerome]], the Vatican&#039;s (surely mythical?) occult investigation arm.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3020</id>
		<title>Session 12</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3020"/>
		<updated>2006-09-07T10:41:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Friday January 5th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 4th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Steve Irwin - R.I.P.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 31st 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett_Tombtstone.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wimbledon Cemetary, the funeral of Doctor Frederick [[Bartlett]]. In the face of some cold stares from Bartlett&#039;s family, the investigators retire to a nearby pub and make plans to travel to Nepal. It is decided to book passage on the next available ship, which will be &#039;[[The Viceroy of India]]&#039;, a new P&amp;amp;O liner which leaves Southampton on Friday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is agreed that to avoid the crossing of the Bay of Biscay, never pleasant at this time of year, the investigators will travel by train to Marseilles and meet the boat there on Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators leave England and head to France, taking a train south to the port of Marseilles, where they buy the gear they feel they need for the journey - walking shoes, packs, alpine rations and survival gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All 3 investigators experience disturbing dreams containing themes and imagery from the Hastur mythos. All feel the influence of [[the King in Yellow]] is growing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators board [[The Viceroy of India]] for the 11 day voyage to [[Bombay]]. Over the next week and a half they will spend a lot of time with their dining companions on Table 8, who they meet that lunchtime (with the exception of Mr Thomas, who does not appear until dinner).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - a diplomat returning to India, who implies that he may be some kind of a spy and clearly has an eye for the ladies and a taste for brandy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - a missionary with the British Bible Society, on his way to continue spreading the Word in the interior of India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - the matronly wife of the Cultural attache in Bombay, returning from visiting her sick sister and very much the &#039;mother hen&#039; of the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - a pudgy, bespectacled man. A minor civil servant taking up a new post in India, Stephen always has his head in a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - a pretty, vivacious typist on her way to visit relatives and see the sub-continent. She knows [[Nathaniel Browne]]&#039;s work and is happy to meet him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Francesca&#039;s quieter, less glamorous friend and travelling companion. from a monied background, she busies herself in voluntary work. Julian Knight immediately latches on to her.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: At this point, Julian Knight is being played by [[Marcus Gustafsson]] and the other players think that Julian is his new character in the campaign.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner that evening, Francesca has attached herself to Browne as is hanging on his every word, while poor Patricia finds herself the object of Knight&#039;s attentions, something that is making her increasingly uncomfortable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During dinner Saunders sees a swarthy looking man looking into the dining room and was sure he&#039;d seen him before, but could not place him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the meal, when it is time for the ship&#039;s orchestra to strike up, [[Withers]] notices Knight is ordering a drink and chivalrously steps in, inviting Patricia to be his dance partner for the evening. Thus paired up, Withers and Browne go to the dancefloor, Knight to the bar and [[Andrew Saunders]] wanders off on his own for the evening. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Francesca returns to Nathaniel&#039;s stateroom where she discovers a copy of [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play amongst Nathaniel&#039;s books. Remembering the dedication from &#039;[[Tatters of the King]]&#039; she asks if she can borrow it. Browne agrees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late that night, Withers hears Saunders return to his cabin. He wonders quite where his friend has been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams on across the Mediterranean. A game of deck quoits takes place, and [[Henrietta Tullis]] presses the investigators into competing against the reverend [[Gore]]. Withers and Browne encounter [[Francesca Nicholson]] and [[Patricia Berry]] once more, and Patricia is impressed to see Withers win handily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the game, [[Saunders]] sees the swarthy stranger once more, but still cannot place him, or catch up with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] arrives and tries once more to ingartiate himself with Patricia. while [[Browne]] continues to get on with Francesca like a house on fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner, Saunders is constantly looking out for the stranger, and the others are starting to get a little worried about him. During the meal, Mrs Tullis and the Rev Gore box Knight in to stop him from bothering Patricia, and Withers finds himself once more spending time with young Miss Berry, whose reticence and shyness is slowly fading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After dinner, as the orchestra strikes up, Withers notices Saunders sneaking off, makes up some quickly invented excuse to extricate himself from his dance with Miss Berry and trails him. Saunders passes into an area signposted as for &#039;Staff only&#039;; Withers (after a brief pause for an internal debate about going into a place that is out of bounds) follows and runs into a lascar seaman. The lascar&#039;s raised voice alerts Saunders who emerges from a nearby door with an unreadable look upon his face. Withers sees the name &amp;quot;Head Steward Wilkins&amp;quot; on the door from which Saunders has emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders tells Withers that Wilkins is an old friend and refuses to say any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back in the ballroom, Knight has managed to get Patricia to dance with him, unprotected by Francesca and Nathaniel who have gone for a walk together. When Knight goes for a drink, Withers rescues her and when Knight returns, Mrs Tullis asks him to dance. Knight drains his brandy glass and accepts his fate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams into Port Said. Many passengers disembark to explore the &#039;&#039;souk&#039;&#039; and experience some exotic culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] spends his time ashore with [[Francesca Nicholson]]. It is obvious to everyone that romance is blossoming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back aboard, dinner that evening has an Egyptian theme. Over dinner, [[Julian Knight]] shows another side to his personality, taking a great interest in the investigators and their travels. Soon this becomes a suspicious amount of interest, as if he is trying to find out something specific. The investigators become suspicious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the middle of dinner a note is hand-delivered to [[Withers]]. The note requests a meeting at the ship&#039;s bow at 10 o&#039;clock that evening, and is signed &#039;[[Aldones]]&#039;. Withers is to come alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of dinner, to the great surprise of the investigators, Knight does not attempt to get Patricia to dance, but simply stands up and leaves. The investigators discuss the mysterious note and decide that Withers will go, but Saunders will follow and watch from the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bow, nobody turns up. Withers waits for only a few minutes, then convinced that this is a transparent plot of Knight&#039;s decides to return to the ballroom where, at about 5 to 10, Knight had turned up and immediately started to work once more on Patricia&#039;s affections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Withers starts to leave a lascar turns up with another note, requesting a 15 minute delay prior to the meeting. Withers does not buy this and hurries back to the ballroom where, with a bit of help from Francessca, he once more rescues Patricia from Knight. Patricia is starting to greatly like Withers and tells Francesca who in turn tells Nathaniel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders hangs back near the bow and sees a shadowy figure arrive at 10.15, wait for a minute then slip away. Saunders fails to follow him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Suez.jpg|right|200px|thumb|The Suez Canal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent travelling through the Suez Canal, a fascinating and unique maritime experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At lunch [[Henrietta Tullis]] mentions the traditional end of voyage show at which each table puts on a small act. [[Francesca Nicholson]] happily suggests a performance of part of &#039;Carcosa: or the Queen and the Stranger&#039;, but both [[Withers]] and [[Saunders]] veto this, citing emotional reasons around the death of their &#039;friend&#039; [[Talbot Estus]]. Instead it is agree to put on a recitation of Gilbert and Sullivan songs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday, January 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Deck_Cricket.jpg|387px|right|thumb|Saunders and Browne at bat]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This afternoon the traditional Port vs Starboard indoor cricket match takes place. All of the investigators take part and perform variously well (and Julian Knight seems to playing as though he is drunk), but it is [[Andrew Saunders]] who shines, very oddly for a Scot. Winning the match virtually single-handedly, Saunders is carried to the bar in triumph!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returning to his stateroom, [[Browne]] is shocked to find that he has been burgled, [[The Turner Codex]] is gone. Browne accuses [[Julian Knight]] of involvement, citing his recent behaviour and the mysterious notes. Knight is questioned by the Chief Purser and instantly cracks under the slightest pressure, revealing his involvement with a mysterious Italian who offered to get [[Withers]] out of his way in return for all he could learn about the investigators&#039; reasons for travel to India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knight also reveals that he was told that a note left for &#039;Aldones&#039; at the telegraph office could be used to make contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is decided to draft such a note suggesting a midnight meeting somewhere on the ship, and that whoever picks up the note should be identified or even followed if possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The note is so drafted, delivered and picked up. The man who picks up the note is identified as [[Umberto]] Zavaroni from stateroom 217.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening no dancing follows dinner. Knight stays well away from Patricia and  the ladies retire to play cards to allow the men to carry out their business.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and a couple of burly crewmen head to the bow while the chief purser and Browne let themselves into the room opposite Zavaroni&#039;s and wait.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 11.45 a man appears at the door to 217, knocks and speaks in Italian. Watching through the peephole, Browne sees him draw a stilleto as Zavaroni&#039;s door starts to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne bursts into the corridor shouting a warning, Zavaroni opens the door. The assassin strikes, glancing a blow off of his target&#039;s money-belt. Browne steps out, swings a well placed fist and smashes the attacker&#039;s nose back into his face knocking him out cold. The stilleto falls to the ground. A Yellow Sign is embossed on its handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;At this point, [[Marcus Gustafsson]] starts to play [[Umberto]] to everyone else&#039;s surprise. It is now revealed that Knight was never his player character, but a mere piece of misdirection, and instead he will be playing Umberto.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is soon revealed that the now unconscious assassin burgled Browne&#039;s cabin and that Umberto has long been a thorn in the side of [[the Brothers of the Yellow Sign]]. He says that &#039;Zavaroni&#039; is a fake name, but that they can call him &#039;Umberto&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other investigators arrive in time to hear Umberto&#039;s tale of following their footsteps for months after his investigation of the activities of the Brotherhood  caused him to become aware of their group. A former Vatican investigator, he takes the threat of [[Hastur]] very seriously and hopes they can be allies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and Browne look at each other, in their eyes the unasked question - &#039;Can we trust this man?&#039;. Browne notices that Umberto wears the symbol of [[The Order of the Sword of St. Jerome]], the Vatican&#039;s (surely mythical?) occult investigation arm.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Order_of_the_Sword_of_St._Jerome&amp;diff=3019</id>
		<title>The Order of the Sword of St. Jerome</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Order_of_the_Sword_of_St._Jerome&amp;diff=3019"/>
		<updated>2006-09-07T10:35:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:jerome.jpg|right|300px|St Jerome]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
According to Nathaniel Browne, who has an interest in all matters occult, the following is the rumoured truth of the Order to which [[Umberto]] belongs, or belonged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This paranoid and secretive religious order once operated under the auspices of the Catholic Church, but since its former dissolution in the late 19th century it has operated only in secret. Responsible for the collection of the original &#039;Z&#039; collection rumoured to be part of the Vatican library, the Order of St. Jerome is devoted to the rooting out and destruction of supernatural evil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Order is said to have a secret Alpine headquarters in which they have copies of many of the forbidden books of the &#039;Z&#039; collection, and more besides.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of the order&#039;s members are wandering holy men travelling the world, living on charity while seeking out evil. They are willing to lay down their lives if necessary, and are said to be willing to sacrifice the lives of others if it serves the greater good in full belief that any innocent who dies in the crossfire of this noble war will be assured a place in heaven.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3017</id>
		<title>Session 12</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_12&amp;diff=3017"/>
		<updated>2006-09-07T10:34:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Wednesday January 10th 1930 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 4th September, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Steve Irwin - R.I.P.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 31st 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett_Tombtstone.png|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wimbledon Cemetary, the funeral of Doctor Frederick [[Bartlett]]. In the face of some cold stares from Bartlett&#039;s family, the investigators retire to a nearby pub and make plans to travel to Nepal. It is decided to book passage on the next available ship, which will be &#039;[[The Viceroy of India]]&#039;, a new P&amp;amp;O liner which leaves Southampton on Friday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is agreed that to avoid the crossing of the Bay of Biscay, never pleasant at this time of year, the investigators will travel by train to Marseilles and meet the boat there on Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday January 5th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators leave England and head to France, taking a train south to the port of Marseilles, where they buy the gear they feel they need for the joirney - walking shoes, packs, alpine rations and survival gear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday January 6th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All 3 investigators experience disturbing dreams containing themes and imagery from the Hastur mythos. All feel the influence of [[the King in Yellow]] is growing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday January 7th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators board [[The Viceroy of India]] for the 11 day voyage to [[Bombay]]. Over the next week and a half they will spend a lot of time with their dining companions on Table 8, who they meet that lunchtime (with the exception of Mr Thomas, who does not appear until dinner).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] - a diplomat returning to India, who implies that he may be some kind of a spy and clearly has an eye for the ladies and a taste for brandy&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reverend [[Ian Gore]] - a missionary with the British Bible Society, on his way to continue spreading the Word in the interior of India&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mrs [[Henrietta Tullis]] - the matronly wife of the Cultural attache in Bombay, returning from visiting her sick sister and very much the &#039;mother hen&#039; of the group&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stephen Thomas]] - a pudgy, bespectacled man. A minor civil servant taking up a new post in India, Stephen always has his head in a book.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Francesca Nicholson]] - a pretty, vivacious typist on her way to visit relatives and see the sub-continent. She knows [[Nathaniel Browne]]&#039;s work and is happy to meet him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Miss [[Patricia Berry]] - Francesca&#039;s quieter, less glamorous friend and travelling companion. from a monied background, she busies herself in voluntary work. Julian Knight immediately latches on to her.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note: At this point, Julian Knight is being played by [[Marcus Gustafsson]] and the other players think that Julian is his new character in the campaign.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner that evening, Francesca has attached herself to Browne as is hanging on his every word, while poor Patricia finds herself the object of Knight&#039;s attentions, something that is making her increasingly uncomfortable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During dinner Saunders sees a swarthy looking man looking into the dining room and was sure he&#039;d seen him before, but could not place him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of the meal, when it is time for the ship&#039;s orchestra to strike up, [[Withers]] notices Knight is ordering a drink and chivalrously steps in, inviting Patricia to be his dance partner for the evening. Thus paired up, Withers and Browne go to the dancefloor, Knight to the bar and [[Andrew Saunders]] wanders off on his own for the evening. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Francesca returns to Nathaniel&#039;s stateroom where she discovers a copy of [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play amongst Nathaniel&#039;s books. Remembering the dedication from &#039;[[Tatters of the King]]&#039; she asks if she can borrow it. Browne agrees.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Late that night, Withers hears Saunders return to his cabin. He wonders quite where his friend has been.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday January 8th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams on across the Mediterranean. A game of deck quoits takes place, and [[Henrietta Tullis]] presses the investigators into competing against the reverend [[Gore]]. Withers and Browne encounter [[Francesca Nicholson]] and [[Patricia Berry]] once more, and Patricia is impressed to see Withers win handily.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
During the game, [[Saunders]] sees the swarthy stranger once more, but still cannot place him, or catch up with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julian Knight]] arrives and tries once more to ingartiate himself with Patricia. while [[Browne]] continues to get on with Francesca like a house on fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By dinner, Saunders is constantly looking out for the stranger, and the others are starting to get a little worried about him. During the meal, Mrs Tullis and the Rev Gore box Knight in to stop him from bothering Patricia, and Withers finds himself once more spending time with young Miss Berry, whose reticence and shyness is slowly fading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After dinner, as the orchestra strikes up, Withers notices Saunders sneaking off, makes up some quickly invented excuse to extricate himself from his dance with Miss Berry and trails him. Saunders passes into an area signposted as for &#039;Staff only&#039;; Withers (after a brief pause for an internal debate about going into a place that is out of bounds) follows and runs into a lascar seaman. The lascar&#039;s raised voice alerts Saunders who emerges from a nearby door with an unreadable look upon his face. Withers sees the name &amp;quot;Head Steward Wilkins&amp;quot; on the door from which Saunders has emerged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders tells Withers that Wilkins is an old friend and refuses to say any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back in the ballroom, Knight has managed to get Patricia to dance with him, unprotected by Francesca and Nathaniel who have gone for a walk together. When Knight goes for a drink, Withers rescues her and when Knight returns, Mrs Tullis asks him to dance. Knight drains his brandy glass and accepts his fate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday January 9th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ship steams into Port Said. Many passengers disembark to explore the &#039;&#039;souk&#039;&#039; and experience some exotic culture.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] spends his time ashore with [[Francesca Nicholson]]. It is obvious to everyone that romance is blossoming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back aboard, dinner that evening has an Egyptian theme. Over dinner, [[Julian Knight]] shows another side to his personality, taking a great interest in the investigators and their travels. Soon this becomes a suspicious amount of interest, as if he is trying to find out something specific. The investigators become suspicious.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the middle of dinner a note is hand-delivered to [[Withers]]. The note requests a meeting at the ship&#039;s bow at 10 o&#039;clock that evening, and is signed &#039;[[Aldones]]&#039;. Withers is to come alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the end of dinner, to the great surprise of the investigators, Knight does not attempt to get Patricia to dance, but simply stands up and leaves. The investigators discuss the mysterious note and decide that Withers will go, but Saunders will follow and watch from the shadows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bow, nobody turns up. Withers waits for only a few minutes, then convinced that this is a transparent plot of Knight&#039;s decides to return to the ballroom where, at about 5 to 10, Knight had turned up and immediately started to work once more on Patricia&#039;s affections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Withers starts to leave a lascar turns up with another note, requesting a 15 minute delay prior to the meeting. Withers does not buy this and hurries back to the ballroom where, with a bit of help from Francessca, he once more rescues Patricia from Knight. Patricia is starting to greatly like Withers and tells Francesca who in turn tells Nathaniel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders hangs back near the bow and sees a shadowy figure arrive at 10.15, wait for a minute then slip away. Saunders fails to follow him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday January 10th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Suez.jpg|right|200px|thumb|The Suez Canal]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent travelling through the Suez Canal, a fascinating and unique maritime experience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At lunch [[Henrietta Tullis]] mentions the traditional end of voyage show at which each table puts on a small act. [[Francesca Nicholson]] happily suggests a performance of part of &#039;Carcosa: or the Queen and the Stranger&#039;, but both [[Withers]] and [[Saunders]] veto this, citing emotional reasons around the death of their &#039;friend&#039; [[Talbot Estus]]. Instead it is agree to put on a recitation of Gilbert and Sullivan songs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday, January 11th 1930 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Deck_Cricket.jpg|387px|right|thumb|Saunders and Browne at bat]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This afternoon the traditional Port vs Starboard indoor cricket match takes place. All of the investigators take part and perform variously well (and Julian Knight seems to playing as though he is drunk), but it is [[Andrew Saunders]] who shines, very oddly for a Scot. Winning the match virtually single-handedly, Saunders is carried to the bar in triumph!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Returning to his stateroom, [[Browne]] is shocked to find that he has been burgled, [[The Turner Codex]] is gone. Browne accuses [[Julian Knight]] of involvement, citing his recent behaviour and the mysterious notes. Knight is questioned by the Chief Purser and instantly cracks under the slightest pressure, revealing his involvement with a mysterious Italian who offered to get [[Withers]] out of his way in return for all he could learn about the investigators&#039; reasons for travel to India.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Knight also reveals that he was told that a note left for &#039;Aldones&#039; at the telegraph office could be used to make contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is decided to draft such a note suggesting a midnight meeting somewhere on the ship, and that whoever picks up the note should be identified or even followed if possible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The note is so drafted, delivered and picked up. The man who picks up the note is identified as [[Umberto]] Zavaroni from stateroom 217.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening no dancing follows dinner. Knight stays well away from Patricia and  the ladies retire to play cards to allow the men to carry out their business.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and a couple of burly crewmen head to the bow while the chief purser and Browne let themselves into the room opposite Zavaroni&#039;s and wait.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At 11.45 a man appears at the door to 217, knocks and speaks in Italian. Watching through the peephole, Browne sees him draw a stilleto as Zavaroni&#039;s door starts to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne bursts into the corridor shouting a warning, Zavaroni opens the door. The assassin strikes, glancing a blow off of his target&#039;s money-belt. Browne steps out, swings a well placed fist and smashes the attacker&#039;s nose back into his face knocking him out cold. The stilleto falls to the ground. A Yellow Sign is embossed on its handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;At this point, [[Marcus Gustafsson]] starts to play [[Umberto]] to everyone else&#039;s surprise. It is now revealed that Knight was never his player character, but a mere piece of misdirection, and instead he will be playing Umberto.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is soon revealed that the now unconscious assassin burgled Browne&#039;s cabin and that Umberto has long been a thorn in the side of [[the Brothers of the Yellow Sign]]. He says that &#039;Zavaroni&#039; is a fake name, but that they can call him &#039;Umberto&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The other investigators arrive in time to hear Umberto&#039;s tale of following their footsteps for months after his investigation of the activities of the Brotherhood  caused him to become aware of their group. A former Vatican investigator, he takes the threat of [[Hastur]] very seriously and hopes they can be allies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders, Withers and Browne look at each other, in their eyes the unasked question - &#039;Can we trust this man?&#039;. Browne notices that Umberto wears the symbol of [[The Order of the Sword of St. Jerome]], the Vatican&#039;s (surely mythical?) occult investigation arm.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_11&amp;diff=2921</id>
		<title>Session 11</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_11&amp;diff=2921"/>
		<updated>2006-09-02T03:11:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Thursday December 19th 1929 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 28th August, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 16th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators meet this evening at Dr. [[Bartlett]]&#039;s house to discuss events in the Severn Valley and what should be done with the information gathered there. [[Saunders]] has arrived back in England that very morning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
the decision is made to visit Milan as quickly as possible in order to be back in London by Christmas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday December 17th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tickets and guidebooks are purchased, excuses are made to spouses, bags are packed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wednesday December 18th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 8.30am boat-train is caught, via Dover, arriving in Paris in late afternoon. With 4 hours to kill before the sleeper rain leaves for Milan, the investigators walk by the Seine and dine at a pleasant bistro in the shadow of Notre-Dame. The sleeper train leaves for Milan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Thursday December 19th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:milan1.jpg|right|300px|thumb|Central Milan]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators arrive in [[Milan]] at 7.30am and book into the Hotel des Anglais. The desk clerk arranges an interpreter/guide, and young [[Paolo Tuminardo]] - well-dressed, polite and a fervent member of the Fascist party is introduced.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators tell him they need a guide for the tourist sites later, but for now they need an interpreter to help them with some urgent business. They ask for his aid in finding the shipping office of [[Giuseppe Colombo]] in Milan&#039;s &#039;&#039;Navigli&#039;&#039; region and he leads them to a cab and thence into the winding streets of Southern Milan&#039;s canal district.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Asking for directions at a small cafe, Tuminardo locates Colombo&#039;s office and leads the way inside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the office a strange pair of companions sit at a desk above which hangs a version of Da Vinci&#039;s &amp;quot;Last Supper&amp;quot; painted from the rear. The two men in the office are a wizened, bald old man with a milky eye and a sour expression and a somewhat effete looking young man with a startlingly sharp nose and long hair.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tuminardo explains that his friends are looking for [[Malcolm Quarrie]] or [[Thomas Villiers]], at which point the young man stands and introduces himself in a refined English accent as Villiers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The old man sits silently, scowling. &amp;quot;Don&#039;t mind Signor Colombo.&amp;quot; says Villiers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators ask about Quarrie, at which point Villiers happily responds &amp;quot;The official story is that they have gone to Tibet, but in reality they are on a Pilgrimage...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Colombo explodes into angry, rapid Italian invective. Obviously he understands enough English to realise what Villers is discussing. The old man shouts at Villers, telling him that he should not tell these strangers such things and that the [[King in Yellow]] will crush the likes of them - at least thats what Tuminardo was able to gather from his tirade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Villiers suggests to the investigators that they accompany him to his studio, he has no idea whats got into Giuseppe, but clearly they have outstayed their welcome. On the way to his studio, a few doors from Colombo&#039;s, Villiers explains that he knew Quarrie in London and came to Italy with him when they both broke with their former friends in England. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators dismiss Paolo and tell him to meet them outside later, then enter Villiers&#039; cramped studio. They are surrounded by dark abstract paintings and blank canvasses. Villiers goes to get a bottle of grappa and some glasses and returns to explain the philosopy of [[The Brothers of the Yellow Sign]] and the purpose of [[Malcolm Quarrie]]&#039;s Pilgrimage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
He tells how he and his friends believe that the Christian Trinity is a distorted version of the true Trinity of [[Hastur]] and that Quarrie, along with the university professor [[Roberto Anzalone]] has gone in search of their God. At about this time [[Browne]] notices a page of notes pinned to a blank canvas. Several phrases leap out at him - &#039;[[Springer Mound]]&#039;, &#039;[[The King in Yellow]]&#039;, &#039;[[Nepal]]&#039; and &#039;[[Drakmar]]&#039;. It seems to be [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/25_Notes_found_in_the_Studio_of_Thomas_Villiers.pdf notes for a planned tryptich]showing the Trinity of Hastur. Browne pockets the paper.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just as Villiers is about to explain the Pilgrimage in detail he suddenly stops talking. A strange look comes across his face as if he&#039;s suddenly realised that he&#039;s telling private business to stangers. He says &#039;I just need to get something&#039; and makes for the door.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before anyone can react, the artist opens the door and cries out &amp;quot;Angel! I bound you and I release you!&amp;quot;. He steps out, slams the door shut behind him and a heavy thump comes from the roof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators look up just as the skylight implodes and a [[byakhee]] crashes down to the floor, almost on top of [[Bartlett]]. Bartlett barely has time to register surprise as the creature tears his stomach open with a single grab of its great claws, spraying gore across the room.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne dives for the window, Saunders grabs an easel and Withers picks up a nearby poker and lays into the monster, cracking a perfect blow against its snout, breaking bone and crushing flesh. the byakhee shrieks and with a thundrous flapping of wings flies staight up and out into the night sky.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Outside, Browne gives chase to Villiers, catching him, landing an ineffective blow and then receiving a well-aimed kick to his bad ankle that leaves him writhing as Villiers flees into the night.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back in the studio the others try to aid Bartlett, but find that he is already dead. The rest of the investigators stand in stunned horror for a few seconds, but still have the presence of mind to search the studio for further clues, though they find none.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The police and an ambulance are called and the investigators explain that their friend was killed by Villiers using some kind of metal implement that they did not see properly. Inspector Materazzi of the Milan police takes them in for questioning and the studio is seasled off as a murder scene.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The police hunt for Villiers, as the prime suspect in Bartlett&#039;s murder, and the respectable nature of the investigators is to their advantage, as their story is believed. They explain their presence in the city as a search for Malcolm Quarrie, who they describe as an old friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Friday December 20th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is taken up with further questioning, formal identification of the body, contacting Bartlett&#039;s family and the Tavistock Institute and all the other inevitable mess that follows a death by foul means.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening [[Thomas Villiers]] is found dead, floating in the canal, an apparent suicide. Materazzi considers the case closed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Saturday December 21th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders decides to take the opportunity to do a little local research with Paolo&#039;s aid and visits the university library. While there he remembers that the unievrsity funded [[Quarrie]] and [[Anzalone]]&#039;s expedition so he makes a call, presents his credentials from the British Museum and ends up having an  afternoon meeting with Dr. Bacci, Anzalone&#039;s colleague who tells him what he knows of [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/27_Newspaper_Article_on_the_Departure_of_Italian_Archaeological_Expedition.pdf the planned expedition].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using information provided by the Englishman, Quarrie, professor Anzalone hopes to discover the lost city of Jiwakhar, former capital of the Southern Tibetan kingdom of Gungthang. Bacci lends an 1845 book about the area to Saunders, and from it, and maps available in the library discovers that Gungthang is immediately North of the little known Nepalese kingdom of [[Mustang]], which was mentioned in [[Villiers]]&#039; notes and which may be the true destination of the &#039;[[Pilgrimage of Grace]]&#039;. The book also mentions &#039;[[Drakmar]]&#039; as being a location within Mustang, but gives no other details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bacci says that Anzalone and Quarrie trvelled with [[Carlo  Schippone]], a graduate student, and Major [[Ricardo Delnegro]] of the &#039;&#039;Alpini&#039;&#039;.  Delnegro&#039;s involvement is indicative of the Fascist government&#039;s desire to be involved in all significant Italian endeavours in order to take its share of the credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bacci believes the expedition will be gone for at least 6 months.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Saunders decides to keep the book and post it back from England.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sunday December 22nd 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Italy being a pious nation, not much is open on Sunday. The surviving investigators rest, read, mourn their friend and start planning a trip to Nepal or Tibet - though Nepal will be problematic as the nation is closed to Westerners.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Monday December 23nd 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The day is spent travelling back to London. Bartlett&#039;s coffin is met by relatives when they reach Paris.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tuesday December 24th 1929 ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surviving investigators arrive in a snowbound London on the morning of Christmas Eve. They are hardly in the mood for celebration, but they all have at least one or two people they need to buy presents for, and they seperate and agree to meet up again at Bartlett&#039;s funeral, which is arranged for New Year&#039;s Eve, Monday 31st December, 1929. Bartlett&#039;s story will end with the decade.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_8&amp;diff=2590</id>
		<title>Session 8</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_8&amp;diff=2590"/>
		<updated>2006-07-25T07:42:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Split Up */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 24th July, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Monday December 10th Continued - Entering Carcosa===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the mist billows away the investigators realise that Mullardoch House is no longer visible. Instead, through the archway ahead of them is what appears to be an abandoned Roman villa. From ahead of them comes light and distance music, behind them the buildings are dark and silent, so they head through the archway.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the other side they see that the villa is now a tall wooden tower with a great fire burning on its peak – like an ancient lighthouse. The archway behind them has changed too, now a simpler, lower building. Deciding that the lighthouse may be important, as it stands where Mulalrdoch House should, they enter its open door to find a bare room containing 4 masks on hooks and the stairs up. The masks are ornare stylised animals: an owl, a pig, an ape and a lion. They take one each and go up to the roof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the room a fire with no apparent fuel course burns in a great brazier. From here they can see the extent of the city, spread along both sides of the Loch, which is now also the Lake of Hali. Twin suns shine palely through the clouds and on the opposite side of the Lake sits a vast palace, from which faint music spills. The decision is made to head for the palace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Back at ground level the entry gate has changed once more, now its surmounted by a great crystal sculpture of a bird with the head of a horse. [[Saunders]] catches a glimpse of movement, turns are sees two creatures that look like the [[the Springer Mound Monsters]] fly behind a distant spire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Narrow Bridge===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators head into the city, soon locating a high bridge, only a foot wide and without handrails, crossing a deep canal. [[Nathaniel Browne]] starts across, slips and falls into the water. [[Withers]] dives in after him, but by the time [[Bartlett]] and [[Saunders]] reach the edge of the path, neither can be seen. They call for their friends, but hear no reply. Saunders decides to hurry across the bridge, also slips and is only just saved by Bartlett. They decide to find another way across further downstream.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers hits the water, resurfaces and realises he cannot see Browne. Treading water he calls for him and hears a distant shout. Steps lead up from the water nearby, so Withers takes them. When he reaches the top the bridge back across the river has changed to something larger and safer, but Withers is alone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne has had a similar experience. After hitting the water he splashed his way to the nearby steps, an shouted up to his friends, but nobody came. Climbing the steps he found himself alone, with an unfamiliar bridge back across the water. Then he heard a gunshots deeper inside the city, and thinking it was his companions, followed the sound.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Split Up===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] finds himself entering a Roman-style ampitheatre, apparently in use as a theatre. He catches a glimpse of movement, sees a gun aimed from behind a pillar and dives for cover as a flurry of pistol shots come his way. He calls out, and his assailant breaks cover and runs for the exit. It is a portly middle-aged man in a tweed suit and tie. The click of hammer on chamber shows he is out of ammunition. Browne intercepts the man, tries to tackle him and receives a pistol blow to the temple in return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne reels away, dazed, but his assailant, recognising Browne as just a man (and a Brit, at that) calms down and apologises, introducing himself as [[Quentin Spence]]. “Quentin Spence the poet?” asks Browne. The man confirms that this is indeed he. Spence is pleased to be recognised and explains that he’s had enough of this place and was trying to leave. He’d come here at [[Edwards]]’ instructions, being a member of the [[Hastur]] ‘brotherhood’ for some time, but he had seen monsters and horrors here that were more than his bargained for. He explains that Edwards has been attempting to summon [[The King in Yellow]], somehow harnessing repeated performances of the [[play]] for power, but thus far has only succeeded in calling up more [[flying creatures]] and other horrible monstrosities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point Browne notices the legs of a corpse sticking out from behind a piece of scenery, a local in carnival gear and a bird mask, dead from a bullet wound to the head. He turns to find Spence backing slowly towards an exit. Browne advances angrily on Spence demanding that he explain his actions. Spence levels his gun at Browne again, says “I&#039;ve reloaded it. I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to kill him – just let me leave”. Browne continues to advance, telling Spence he can leave, but not with the gun as he fears that Spence cannot be trusted with it. Spence drops the gun and scuttles away. Unfortunately, as Browne suspected, he was bluffing and had not reloaded the gun after all. Browne now wanders the streets of Carcosa alone and unarmed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers soon encounters a group of locals, Carcosan revellers, masked as they all are. One of these locals, a leatherworker named [[Noss]] takes an interest in Withers and offers to be his guide. He can take him to a place where he can be renuited with his companions, or to the lakeside where a boat the the Palace can be procured, or to see the ‘other outsider’, who can be found at the Scultpure Museum. Withers asked about this man and from the description he is given realises that it is probably [[Alexander Roby]], He asks to be taken the the Sculpture Museum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Crossing the canal through a tunnel, Saunders and Bartlett find themselves in an area of narrow winding residential streets. The catch a distant glimpse of what appears to be [[the Stranger]] from the play, head in his direction and eventually come upon the gardens surrounding the Sculpture Museum, where they encounter Withers and Noss, who have just arrived.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Poor Nathaniel Browne wanders Carcosa alone, unaware of any of this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Sculpture Museum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Noss]] leads the investigators towards the small white building the the centre of a garden full of many fantastic works of sculpture, including a medusa, a perfect simulacrum of a cypress tree standing beside its living twin and, immediately outside the entrance to the building, four creatures like [[the Springer Mound Monsters]] which turn out not to be statues at all, but the real thing, bound here for centuries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A doorway leads to a concourse and a great stairway leading into the first of a network of great underground galleries. Noss leads the way past two enomrous and beautiful dioarmas of New YoRk City, one current and one futuristic, through a gallery of thousands of whistles from many times and cultures, each similar in its own way to the cult&#039;s [[bone whistle]]s and via many other strange sights. In one gallery [[Andrew Saunders]] finds an unfinished clay man that reminds him of [[Nathaniel Browne]]. Eventually they discover a circular study hall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once inside, they find Roby, initially napping, but easily wakened and now apparently sane and rational, he greets [[Bartlett]] and is happy to discuss whats happening. He has brought Carcosa to Earth by writing it into being and now he can life here eternally. The city will remain on Earth for 4 more days before it leaves, taken with it all who remain. The rest of the cult are staying in the Palace, where they are enjoying the Queen&#039;s hospitality, but Roby wanted some solitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Noss tells them that Roby’s friends, lead by [[Edwards]] have been summoning creatures such as the one they saw in the woods - Roby recognises these as the Spawn of Hastur, and that a great flock of flying creatures, which Roby calls [[byakhee]] are also present. Roby realises Edwards is trying to call the King in Yellow, which is impossible in this place (Roby wrote a flaw into the city when he created it) and doing so will bring Hastur in a terrible form that’ll kill everyone. Roby decides to head the Palace to talk to Edwards – the others come with him.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Lake of Hali===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roby leads everyone to the lakeside, where they are pleased to find [[Browne]] at the wharf. Across the Lake the roof of the palace is covered in hundreds of [[byakhee]], but nonetheless they find a boat and start throw across the lake. [[Noss]], unwilling to defile the palace with his presence, bids his farewell and stays ashore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Halfway across a Spawn surfaces, dives under the boat and knocks it heavily, pitching [[Withers]] and [[Saunders]] into the Lake. They are able to grab onto oars and save themselves, and only [[Bartlett]] gets a clear view as the creature breaks the surface off the stern and dives back into the depths. An hour or so later the boat reaches the crowded palace wharf and the investigators enter the massive and complex Palace of Cassilda.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===In the Palace===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Inside the palace they travel through many halls and corridors, seeing occasional glimpses of revllers under they come across the corpse of a cook, his throat slashed, and [[Withers]] sees [[Coombes]] bloody knife in hand, fleeing the scene.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the investigators move on through a long gallery, Coombes appears on a balcony high above the party and taunts them. Browne retorts in kind, reminding Coombes of his failure to protect Bacon. It appears that being here has sent Coombes over the edge and he is now using the palace as a private hunting ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A few rooms later a young noblewoman, [[Yolanda]] runs straight into [[Withers]]. She apologises but says that a tall man with a knife was chasing her. They here Coombes&#039; footsteps hurrying away down the corridor. Yolanda asked the investigators where they are going, and offers to help them find the terrace where the visitors are performing their play - a play they are performing for the fourth consecutive evening. The investigators realise that time is unreliable here, as it should not yet be dark. The view through the windows, however, shows alien stars in a black sky.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yolanda leads them to a room overlooking the terrace where [[Edwards]] and his friends are acting out a version of &amp;quot;[[the King in Yellow]]&amp;quot; for an audience of hundreds of strangely silent [[byakhee]]. As a part of the play Edwards is being repeatedly struck with a sword, blood everywhere, but instantly healing his wounds. Roby explains that he’s been able to do the since Springer Mound, and that his seems to like it. [[Saunders]] wants to use the [[Chime of Tezchaptl] to interrupt the play, but Roby says this will bring the byakhee down on them – he is sure that [[Hastur]] is not coming just yet and wants a chance to talk to Edwards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators agree to wait, and watch as the play concludes and another Spawn is summoned from he waters of the Lake. Yolanda suggests everyone retire to her chambers. By now she&#039;s openly flirting with Withers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Roby&#039;s Plans===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Alexander Roby]] tells the others to get some rest – he needs to go and see [[Edwards]] alone. He leaves and returns an hour later, furious – Edwards means to go through with it and won’t listen to reason. Roby says he needs to consider the answer. a little later he asks to borrow a revolver, and is given one. [[Bartlett]] is instantly worried by his manner and does not allow him to leave the room. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Sorry, Bartlett” it’s the only way, and he makes to shoot himself. Roby explains that if he dies, [[Carcosa]] will leave the Earth and Edwards’ plan fail. There follows a tense scene where the investigators talk him out of suicide, which is resolved when they come up with an alternate plan. Roby can have the [[Chime of Tezchaptl]] and try to use that first. If it fails, suicide is still an option. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rest of the day is spent waiting for the next performance of ‘The King in Yellow’ as Roby reads [[the Turner Codex]] so he can learn the usage of the Chime. As the time comes, Roby tells the investigators they cannot come with him, He’s told [[Yolanda]] how to get them out of Carcosa and he&#039;s asked her to take them immediately. If they don’t follow they will be trapped in Carcosa when it leaves Earth. Feeling guilty at leaving him to face his fate alone, but also feeling powerless to do otherwise, the investigators follow Yolanda through the palace to a garden containing a maze – she leads them inside, but Coombes has been following. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Leaving Carcosa===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the maze, Yolanda loses her way and walks into an ambush. She is assaulted by Coombes, but his knife misses. As he flees he is winged by a shot from [[Withers]], but vanishes into the maze.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point the howls of a thousand [[byakhee]] come from the Lake and the city begins to shake – Roby has succeeded. The investigatoirs, realising they have little time, hurry to reach the centre of the maze, where a stone mosaic of the Yellow Sign is found.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Browne]] steps onto it and disappears, but [[Yolanda]] reveals she cannot follow. [[Withers]] steps through, then [[Saunders]] and [[Bartlett]] realise that if they go through, Yolanda will be trapped with Coombes. Bartlett, badly shaken, apologises and leaves. Saunders decides to leave her armed and hands his shotgun to Yolanda, as he tries to explain its use, Coombes arrives.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
“Hello Andrew” he says, “ready to play with the big boys?” and he throws a knife in front of Saunders. Yolanda is staring at the gun in her hands, with no apparent idea of its function, so a knife fight starts. Unfortunately Coombes is very good, and Saunders isn’t. Saunders feels Coombes&#039; sharp blade enter his side, falls back onto the mosaic and hears the blast of a gunshot just as he passes back into his own world.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mullardoch House===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators find themselves in the enclosed kitchen garden of Mullardoch House as Carcosa shimmers and blinks out of existence around them. [[Saunders]] is badly hurt, so [[Withers]] and [[Browne]] enter the house to find a telephone. in the hall they find the hideously burned and twisted corpse of [[Edwards]], hurled back into this world when the energy of the spell was turned back on him by Roby jusing the Chime.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Browne picks up the phone, Withers sees the corpse start to shift and transform, rising seconds later as a humanoid horror with boneless arms – mathcing the description of the Canal Monster, which they guess must have been [[Lawrence Bacon]], similarly resurrected. Withers fires several revolver shots at the thing with little visible effect and it closes on Browne, who is cornered. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Suddenly [[Bartlett]] rushes in with a garden fork and pins the Edwards thing to the wall. The suckers on the end of its boneless arm engulf the side of the Doctor’s head and half of Bartlett’s face is torn away just as Withers puts a well-aimed rifle bullet straight through its brain.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Edwrads dies, for good this time, his corpse reverted to its former ruin.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Bartlett is saved from the brink of death by Withers’ first aid skills, and help is called for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That same night, 12 people died of ‘natural causes’ in the nearby hamlet of Cannich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators have been left with a warning from Roby. Unlike Edwards, Malcolm Quarrie knows what he’s doing. He plans to call the King in Yellow to Earth and must be found, and stopped. With Bartlett and Saunders seriosuly injured and hospitalised, and the authorities in search of explanations, Quarrie will have to wait.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meanwhile, that very night, a dozen of the villagers&#039; of Cannich die, in an echo of events in [[Clare Melford]]&#039;s &#039;night of the curse&#039;. There is a [[http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/19_Newspaper_Article_on_Events_in_the_Highlands.pdf report]] in the next day&#039;s newspaper &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The investigators are taken to Inverness, two of them to hospital, two for questioning by the police. Its a long night for everyone.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carcosa&amp;diff=2458</id>
		<title>Carcosa</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carcosa&amp;diff=2458"/>
		<updated>2006-07-15T03:44:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: /* Singularities */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A wandering, dreamlike city, across the lake of Hali from [[Yhtill]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Singularities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. It appeared overnight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. One could not tell from looking at it whether the city sat upon the waters of the lake, or beyond them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. When the moon arose, the towers of the city appeared behind it, not in front of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. As soon as one looked upon the city, one knew its name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Unknown, but has something to do with the &#039;mystery of the [[Hyades]]&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[images:carcosa.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carcosa&amp;diff=2457</id>
		<title>Carcosa</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Carcosa&amp;diff=2457"/>
		<updated>2006-07-15T03:43:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;A wandering, dreamlike city, across the lake of Hali from [[Yhtill]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Singularities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. It appeared overnight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. One could not tell from looking at it whether the city sat upon the waters of the lake, or beyond them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. When the moon arose, the towers of the city appeared behind it, not in front of it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. As soon as one looked upon the city, one knew its name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Unknown, but has something to do with the &#039;mystery of the [[Hyades]]&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[iamges:carcosa.jpg]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_4&amp;diff=2280</id>
		<title>Session 4</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_4&amp;diff=2280"/>
		<updated>2006-06-05T06:08:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 29th May, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 9th 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After dinner - the investigators decide what to do next. They have leads to [[Lawrence Bacon]], [[Malcolm Quarrie]] and [[Edwards]] and have been told of the &#039;Nine Teeth&#039; prepared at [[Clare Melford]]. Over port and cigars they make their plans.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Withers]] offers to set his private detective the task of checking up on Edwards, Bacon and Quarrie - to see if their current addresses match those given by [[Vincent Tuck]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The decision is made to drive to [[Clare Melford]] on Saturday.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 10th 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Japan, the Emperor Hirohito is enthroned. In England, the four investigators drive, in Saunders&#039; Cowley, to Suffolk. The day is cold, but clear, with snow on the ground. They stop in Clare for lunch at the Plough Inn before heading into [[Clare Melford]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Clare Melford they visit the Railway Inn and meet the landlord, Dick Blair. He only moved to the village in early 1926, so is no help with regards to the events of late 1925, so they start to talk to the locals.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talking to one of the locals, Saunders and Browne hear of [[Springer Mound]], and another team of archaelogical students who visited it in the pre-war years. They find out that Springer Mound is on the land of [[Harold Jennings]], who has kept a part of his land uncultivated and does not take kindly to strangers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] asks Blair, the publican, if he remembers anything peculiar happening in the December of 1925, but it turns out that he did not move to the town until some months later. One of the barmaids,  however, overhears the conversation and approaches the investigators&#039; table to tell them of &#039;the night of the curse&#039; on New Year&#039;s Eve 1925, when 5 locals (4 elderly and 1 small child) all died of apparently natural causes. None of those who died were in good health, but that they all died in one night is particularly odd. [[Browne]] asks whether any strangers were seen to visit the town on or near that night, but none is remembered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is decided that a walk past [[Jennings]]&#039; land on the public footpath is in order. While examining Springer Mound from a distance, the investigators encounter the bellicose Jennings and his large, vicious looking dogs, Henry and Lucas. Jennings is unfriendly and basically warns them off.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] spots two dark shapes circling high above the mound - others look at them through [[Withers]]&#039; binoculars, but the best guess is that they are some kind of bat or large bird.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The group drives to nearby [[Long Melford]] and finds rooms for the night at the Ox Tavern. There they find locals who remember a large bearded man fitting the description of [[Lawrence Bacon]] who stayed in the village with a group of &#039;well-to-do Londoners&#039; at New Year 1925. These men left the village on the evening of New Year&#039;s Eve and did not return. That night five people died in [[Clare Melford]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 11th 1928, Remembrance Sunday===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Withers]] has to leave for Windsor first thing on Sunday to be back for the Armistice day ceremonies. he catches the train from Sudbury with [[Bartlett]] and the two men spend their day with Withers&#039; regiment at both the ceremony and the extended drinking session that follows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Suffolk, [[Saunders]] and [[Browne]] decide to take a walk to [[Springer Mound]] from the [[Long Melford]] side. Trudging through fresh snow, they climb the hill where they discover a viscous pool of tar-like liquid that smells like rotting fruit. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne puts his foot in a hole hidden under the snow and falls heavily, spraining his ankle. The hole proves to be large enough to have held a standing stone. Looking down into the heavily overgrown area on the other side, Saunders sees several large stones lying on their side amongst the bushes and goes down to examine them, leaving Browne to rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are nine stones, each a large granite obelisk of recent manufacture, engraved with lines of poetry, or ritual, in English. Saunders has just noticed a reference to &#039;[[Hastur]]&#039; when an angry [[Harold Jennings]] appears, with his dogs and starts waving his shotgun at Saunders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Saunders puts his hands up and tries to explain himself, Jennings fires - either a warning shot or an accidental discharge - and hits one of the stones. Saunders turns and runs. At this point, one of the two [[flying creatures]] seen above the Mound on the previous day, drops like a stone from the sky, straight past Saunders and [[Browne]], and swoops towards Jennings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Harold Jennings]] screams, tries to raise his gun and is hit by a horror beyond imagining. Saunders stops running, turns around, and gets a clear view as the monster rips Jennings&#039; throat out in front of him. Saunders continues his flight towards Browne, shouting &#039;Run, run!&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The thing that kills Jennings is taller than a man, part insect, part reptile, with huge leathery wings, sharp claws and a head like the skull of a horse, yet filled with knifelike teeth.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As Saunders and Browne flee across the snow, Browne hobbling on his bad ankle, the creature rises into the air, circles once then flies back down in the direction of Jennings&#039; farm. Browne and Saunders make it to the Inn in [[Long Melford]] and immediately ask for a doctor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They are directed to the local GP, Doctor Elsworth. On [[Saunders]]&#039; frantic insistence Elsworth calls the local constable, PC Smith, who arrives in minutes. Saunders tells him that [[Harold Jennings]] has been attacked, maybe killed, by his own dogs. Smith borrows a shotgun from Elsworth and saks Saunders to direct him to the site of the attack.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On Jennings&#039; land, they locate the corpse of the farmer, and almost immediately hear howls  from the barn. Smith hurries towards the noise, but Saunders, who is unarmed, hangs back out of fear. He sees the policeman enter the barn, hears a gunshot, a scream and several indescribable noises - then flees in terror back to the village.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This time the police are called in force. Arriving within half an hour from Sudbury they hurry to the farm and discover the corpses of [[Jennings]] and Smith, as well as those of the two dogs. They conclude that the dogs killed each other after killing Smith, although there is some suspicion that a third animal may have left the scene and is now wandering the countryside.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Saunders]] and [[Browne]] are allowed to leave, and they drive back to London, badly shaken. On arrival they contact their friends and arrange to meet for lunch the next day. That night, both Saunders and Browne dream disturbing dreams.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meanwhile, high above [[Springer Mound]], two black shapes resume their tireless circling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 12th, 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:dogattack.jpg|right|200px|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the morning, [[Withers]] instructs his private detective, Walsh, to confirm the background information learned about [[Edwards]], [[Malcolm Quarrie]] and [[Lawrence Bacon]], to check which if any of them remain at their former addresses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At lunch, [[Saunders]] and [[Browne]] describe the Suffolk horror, and the [[flying creatures]]  to their friends. [[Bartlett]] offers Saunders a &#039;professional session&#039; in the afternoon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That afternoon Saunders visits the Tavistock Institute and talks to Bartlett. Bartlett ends the interview convinced that Saunders is telling the truth, and shaken by the details that match the dream he had in Herefordshire - the smell of rotten fruit and the nine stone obelisks on [[Springer Mound]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meanwhile, [[Withers]] returns to barracks to be confronted by a drunken, incoherent [[Peter Morrison]]. Morrison seems unsure what he wants, and leaves, but Withers realises that he very probably got Withers&#039; card from [[Delia Morrison]] by force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Audio Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.tentaclesandunderpants.info/downloads/download.html;jsessionid=ahbrej6d1lfjq?id=21859 Audio Recording of the Fourth Session.]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2268</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2268"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:20:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2267</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2267"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:20:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2266</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2266"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:20:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left|180px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2265</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2265"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:20:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2264</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2264"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:19:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left|100px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2263</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2263"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:19:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left|30px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Player_Characters&amp;diff=2262</id>
		<title>Player Characters</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Player_Characters&amp;diff=2262"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:16:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#redirect [[The Cast]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tatters_of_the_King&amp;diff=2261</id>
		<title>Tatters of the King</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Tatters_of_the_King&amp;diff=2261"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:16:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: /* Player Characters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Tatters_Cover.gif|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tatters of the King&#039;&#039;&#039;[http://catalog.chaosium.com/product_info.php?products_id=773&amp;amp;osCsid=07f84f248e3a49f3cf6199ee7fbb6629] is a new Call of Cthulhu campaign written by Tim Wiseman and published by [http://chaosium.com Chaosium] and through which our role-playing [http://tentaclesandunderpants.info group] is currently being run. Play started on May 8th 2006. See [[current events]] for next session date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The game is being played in the suburb of Ellerslie, in [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Auckland Auckland, New Zealand].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The game is initially set in [http://www.yog-sothoth.com/docs/article-london-guide-1928.pdf London], [http://greywolfnz.homeip.net/wiki/attachments/1928.doc 1928]. It is the start of a bitterly cold winter, the worst in decades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
London is the capital of an empire covering a quarter of the globe and governing one quarter  of the human race. The people busy themselves with concerns of politics and government, finance and production, work and recreation. How fragile things are. What ignorance there is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are those whose engage in different pursuits - who would see an inhuman power come to Earth such that it would make mundane activity seem like a last twitch before dying.........&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==GM==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Keeper of Arcane Lore is [[Mark Chiddicks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Players==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The players are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nicola Bishop]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Julia Blackmore]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Marcus Gustafsson]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Darryn Mercer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==[[Player Characters]]==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]] - Eminent research psychologist, played by Marcus Gustafsson.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] - A failed writer, looking for his big story, played by Darryn Mercer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Andrew Saunders]] - British Museum curator and proud Scot, Played by Julia Blackmore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Captain George Withers]] - Coldstream Guards. Career soldier. Played by Nicola Bishop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notable Non-Player Characters==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Prologue&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Talbot Estus]] - American novelist, now debuting as a playwright&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;The Group&#039;&#039; - an amateur theatrical troupe:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Michael Gillen]] - Retired publisher, amateur actor and acquaintance of [[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]]. Estus&#039;s friend and companion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Hannah Keith]] - Amateur Actress and sister of [[Andrew Saunders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[George Keith]] - Amateur Actor and husband of [[Hannah Keith]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Walter Paige]] - Amateur Actor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Jean Hewart]] - Amateur Actress&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter One&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr. Charles Highsmith]] - Asylum Superintendent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Alexander Roby]] - Incarcerated Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lucius Harriwell]] - Incarcerated Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Price and Evans]] - Asylum Nurses&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Two&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] (deceased) - Roby family physician&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Grahame Roby]] - Financier, Alexander Roby&#039;s brother&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Detective Inspector Andrew Taylor]] - of New Scotland Yard&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Delia Hartston]] - Alexander Roby&#039;s former fiancee, now [[Delia Morrison]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Vincent Tuck]] - Private Detective, hired by Grahame Roby&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lawrence Bacon]] - Antiquarian and occultist&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Tall Man]] - Sinister stalker, possibly named [[Coombes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chapter Three&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Harold Jennings]] (deceased) - Unfriendly Suffolk farmer&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Literary Works==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Carcosa, or The Queen and the Stranger]]  - a fantasy in two acts, [http://greywolfnz.homeip.net/wiki/attachments/CARCOSA.pdf script] by [[Talbot Estus]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Le Roi en Jeune]] - a rare French play, playwright anonymous&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_King_in_Yellow The King in Yellow] - a collection of short [http://www.yankeeclassic.com/miskatonic/library/stacks/literature/chambers/stories/kinginye/contents.htm stories] by [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_W._Chambers Robert W Chambers]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[An Inhabitant of Carcosa and Haita the Shepherd]] - by [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ambrose_Bierce Ambrose Bierce]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Der Wanderer durch den See]] - by [[Alexander Roby]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.mdx.ac.uk/www/study/mapengwa.htm  Map of England and Wales, 1928]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.yog-sothoth.com/docs/article-london-guide-1928.pdf London], England - [http://www.londonancestor.com/maps/roads-central.htm Map of London, 1926]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Scala Theatre]], Charlotte St, London&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[St Agnes Asylum]], [[Weobley]], Herefordshire, England&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Clare Melford]], Suffolk, England&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sessions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;As referred to in the session reports below, there have been a number of [[murders]] related to the Roby case.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 1]] - Opening Night&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 1.5]] - The Madman&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 2]] - The Plot Thickens&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 3]] - Alexander&#039;s Friends&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 4]] - Teeth of Winter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Session 5]] - Four Go Mad in London&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2260</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2260"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:15:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2259</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2259"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:15:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: /* George Withers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2258</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2258"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:15:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: /* George Withers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===George Withers===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2257</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2257"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:15:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: /* George Withers */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===George Withers===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|right]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2256</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2256"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:14:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===George Withers===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|left]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2255</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2255"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:14:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===George Withers===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|right]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2254</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2254"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:14:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===George Withers===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|right]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2253</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2253"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:14:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;===George Withers===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Captain George Withers]] is a career soldier. An officer in the Second Battalion of the Coldstream Guards, he is currently stationed at Victoria barracks, Windsor, a quarter of a mile from the castle. He is a decorated veteran of the Great War, during which he met [[Doctor Frederick Bartlett]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders|right]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2252</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2252"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:12:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2251</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2251"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:12:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2250</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2250"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:10:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers]][[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett]][[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne]][[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2249</id>
		<title>The Cast</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=The_Cast&amp;diff=2249"/>
		<updated>2006-06-01T07:10:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:40 Inspecteur.jpg|thumb|George Withers]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Bartlett.jpg|thumb|Dr. Frederick Bartlett]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nathaniel.jpg|thumb|Nathaniel Browne]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Saunders.jpg|thumb|Andrew Saunders]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Frederick_Long&amp;diff=2121</id>
		<title>Frederick Long</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Frederick_Long&amp;diff=2121"/>
		<updated>2006-05-28T06:05:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.7: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Orderly at [[St Agnes Asylum]], present during [[Dr Bartlett]]&#039;s first interview with [[Alexander Roby]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Murdered under mysterious circumstances in the laundry room of the asylum on November 5th, 1928. His murder is an apparent copy of the murder of Nurse [[Cuthbert Yates]], nearly a year earlier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[The Tall Man]], while intimidating [[Nathaniel Browne]], all but admitted to killing Long.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.7</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Nathaniel_Browne%27s_Secrets&amp;diff=1867</id>
		<title>Nathaniel Browne&#039;s Secrets</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Nathaniel_Browne%27s_Secrets&amp;diff=1867"/>
		<updated>2006-05-18T10:06:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Nathaniel&#039;s friend, Jean-Paul Etienne, is a user and supplier of certain mind-expanding substances (including opium). Nathaniel has partaken of these on occassion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nathaniel does not, as he appears to, live off any inheritance. In fact his parents left him very little. Instead he writes gossip columns for a London paper under a pseudonym.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_2&amp;diff=1866</id>
		<title>Session 2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_2&amp;diff=1866"/>
		<updated>2006-05-18T10:02:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: /* November 5th 1928 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 15th May, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===October 31st 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Halloween. The four friends meet at [[Dr Bartlett]]&#039;s Wimbledon home on Wednesday evening, for a game of bridge. The house has been dressed with pumpkins and other &#039;spooky&#039; accountrements by Mrs Bartlett. Dr Bartlett raises the subject of the [[play]] and mentions that he recently encountered references to various elements of its contents during a professional consultation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] explains that such elements have already been published as part of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_W._Chambers Chambers&#039;] work and that this would explain where Bartlett&#039;s patient most likely encountered it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 1st 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr Bartlett]] meets [[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] in his London home. Trollope describes the [[Roby murders]], and explains that he does not think [[Alexander Roby]] is now, or ever will be, fit for release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trollope seems drained and preoccupied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]], desiring to peruse a copy of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039;, calls [[Talbot Estus]] and reveals what he has so far discovered about the roots of the [[play]]. Intrigued by names in the play turning up in the [[works of Ambrose Bierce]] and thus having a possible source which predates &#039;Le Roi en Jeune&#039;, Estus arranges for Nathaniel to visit him for lunch the following day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On his return home, Bartlett discovers that a man claiming to be a taxi driver was looking for his house earlier in the day, but never called. This appears to be [[the Tall Man]], who makes more appearances later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 2nd 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] keeps his lunch date with [[Talbot Estus]]. Arriving at the home of Estus and [[Michael Gillen]], Nathaniel finds that Gillen is away on business. Over lunch, Browne and Estus describe their mutual enthusiasm for &#039;[[the King in Yellow]]&#039;. Estus is surprised and offended by Nathaniel&#039;s insistence that the [[play]] was not performed as written, but nonetheless is persuaded to lend Browne his copy of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr Bartlett]] visits [[Grahame Roby]] who is belligerent and unhelpful, but does  mention [[Delia Hartston]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roby clearly does not have the slightest intention of consenting to [[Alexander Roby]]&#039;s release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening, Bartlett dines with [[Withers]] and tells him what he has learned about the Roby case. Withers offers to attempt to trace [[Delia Hartston]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 3rd 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] begins his own translation of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039;, finding that it differs from [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play in some significant ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A man, possibly [[the Tall Man]] delivers a housebrick to [[Captain George Withers]] at Victoria Barracks, in what appears to have been an exercise to confirm Withers&#039; billet. Withers arranges to change his accomodation in reaction to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers, prompted by [[Bartlett]] engages a private investigator, by telephone, to trace [[Delia Hartston]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As evening falls, [[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] is murdered in St James&#039;s Park.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 4th 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The morning&#039;s newspapers [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/08_Newspaper_Story_on_the_Murder_of_Dr_Trollope.pdf report] the murder of [[Dr. Lionel Trollope]], one of the suspects matches the description of [[the Tall Man]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Later, [[Dr Bartlett]] recieves a posthumous letter ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/09_Letter_from_Dr_Trollope_part_1.pdf page 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/09_Letter_from_Dr_Trollope_part_2.pdf page 2]) from Trollope, mentioning [[Delia Hartston]], [[Lawrence Bacon]] and [[Vincent Tuck]]. The letter appears to predict, in exact detail, the circumstances of Trollope&#039;s death.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 5th 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guy Fawkes Night. Fireworks at [[Dr Bartlett]]&#039;s house. They discuss the events of the last few days, during which is becomes clear that everyone knows that Bartlett has been consulting on the case of [[Alexander Roby]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bartlett]] discusses the fact that he has been somewhat disturbed by his current work and that a friend of his ([[Dr. Lionel Trollope]]) has not only been murdered, but apparently predicted the exact circumstances of his demise in his letter to Bartlett. He urges [[Browne]] to find a book called [[The Walker by the Lake]] which may be pertinant to the case. Browne agrees but is frustrated by Bartlett&#039;s unwillingness to share details of the book such as its authorship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] reveals the copy of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039; that he borrowed from Estus. The [[Yellow Sign]] on the cover seems to writhe and move upon the page, disturbing [[Withers]] and bringing back memories of bad dreams for [[Andrew Saunders]]. This dream was the mirror of Saunders&#039; previous doppelganger dream. in this version Saunders was the armed version of himself, attempting to seize a crown from his unarmed self.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne reveals what he has discovered about &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039; and its differences from [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s [[play]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After [[Bartlett]]&#039;s wife calls everyone outside for the fireworks (during which [[Browne]] sees the [[Yellow Sign]] formed by one of them, but the others do not), Bartlett recieves a frantic phone call from Nurse [[Price]] at the asylum, announcing the murder of [[Frederick Long]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the way home, [[Saunders]]&#039; cab is cut off by a black car and Saunders is threatened by [[the Tall Man]], who warns Saunders to tell his friends to &#039;drop this matter&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Audio Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.tentaclesandunderpants.info/downloads/download.html;jsessionid=1orm91qo6l1al?id=14004 Audio Recording of the Second Session]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_2&amp;diff=1865</id>
		<title>Session 2</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://tatterswiki.ddns.net/index.php?title=Session_2&amp;diff=1865"/>
		<updated>2006-05-18T10:02:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;192.168.0.2: /* November 5th 1928 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Session Report - Played Monday 15th May, 2006==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===October 31st 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Halloween. The four friends meet at [[Dr Bartlett]]&#039;s Wimbledon home on Wednesday evening, for a game of bridge. The house has been dressed with pumpkins and other &#039;spooky&#039; accountrements by Mrs Bartlett. Dr Bartlett raises the subject of the [[play]] and mentions that he recently encountered references to various elements of its contents during a professional consultation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] explains that such elements have already been published as part of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_W._Chambers Chambers&#039;] work and that this would explain where Bartlett&#039;s patient most likely encountered it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 1st 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr Bartlett]] meets [[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] in his London home. Trollope describes the [[Roby murders]], and explains that he does not think [[Alexander Roby]] is now, or ever will be, fit for release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trollope seems drained and preoccupied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]], desiring to peruse a copy of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039;, calls [[Talbot Estus]] and reveals what he has so far discovered about the roots of the [[play]]. Intrigued by names in the play turning up in the [[works of Ambrose Bierce]] and thus having a possible source which predates &#039;Le Roi en Jeune&#039;, Estus arranges for Nathaniel to visit him for lunch the following day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On his return home, Bartlett discovers that a man claiming to be a taxi driver was looking for his house earlier in the day, but never called. This appears to be [[the Tall Man]], who makes more appearances later on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 2nd 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] keeps his lunch date with [[Talbot Estus]]. Arriving at the home of Estus and [[Michael Gillen]], Nathaniel finds that Gillen is away on business. Over lunch, Browne and Estus describe their mutual enthusiasm for &#039;[[the King in Yellow]]&#039;. Estus is surprised and offended by Nathaniel&#039;s insistence that the [[play]] was not performed as written, but nonetheless is persuaded to lend Browne his copy of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Dr Bartlett]] visits [[Grahame Roby]] who is belligerent and unhelpful, but does  mention [[Delia Hartston]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Roby clearly does not have the slightest intention of consenting to [[Alexander Roby]]&#039;s release.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That evening, Bartlett dines with [[Withers]] and tells him what he has learned about the Roby case. Withers offers to attempt to trace [[Delia Hartston]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 3rd 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] begins his own translation of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039;, finding that it differs from [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s play in some significant ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A man, possibly [[the Tall Man]] delivers a housebrick to [[Captain George Withers]] at Victoria Barracks, in what appears to have been an exercise to confirm Withers&#039; billet. Withers arranges to change his accomodation in reaction to this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Withers, prompted by [[Bartlett]] engages a private investigator, by telephone, to trace [[Delia Hartston]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As evening falls, [[Dr. Lionel Trollope]] is murdered in St James&#039;s Park.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 4th 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The morning&#039;s newspapers [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/08_Newspaper_Story_on_the_Murder_of_Dr_Trollope.pdf report] the murder of [[Dr. Lionel Trollope]], one of the suspects matches the description of [[the Tall Man]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Later, [[Dr Bartlett]] recieves a posthumous letter ([http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/09_Letter_from_Dr_Trollope_part_1.pdf page 1], [http://www.artistmonkey.com/Downloads/09_Letter_from_Dr_Trollope_part_2.pdf page 2]) from Trollope, mentioning [[Delia Hartston]], [[Lawrence Bacon]] and [[Vincent Tuck]]. The letter appears to predict, in exact detail, the circumstances of Trollope&#039;s death.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===November 5th 1928===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guy Fawkes Night. Fireworks at [[Dr Bartlett]]&#039;s house. They discuss the events of the last few days, during which is becomes clear that everyone knows that Bartlett has been consulting on the case of [[Alexander Roby]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Bartlett]] discusses the fact that he has been somewhat disturbed by his current work and that a friend of his ([[Dr. Lionel Trollope]]) has not only been murdered, but apparently predicted the exact circumstances of his demise in his letter to Bartlett. He urges [[Browne]] to find a book called [[The Walker by the Lake]] which may be pertinant to the case. Browne agrees but is frustrated by Bartlett&#039;s unwillingness to share details of the book such as its authorship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Nathaniel Browne]] reveals the copy of &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039; that he borrowed from Estus. The [[Yellow Sign]] on the cover seems to writhe and move upon the page, disturbing [[Withers]] and bringing back memories of bad dreams for [[Andrew Saunders]]. This dream was the mirror of Saunders&#039; previous doppelganger dream. in this version Saunders was the armed version of himself, attempting to seize a crown from his unarmed self.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Browne reveals what he has discovered about &#039;[[Le Roi en Jeune]]&#039; and its differences from [[Talbot Estus]]&#039;s [[play]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After Bartlett&#039;s wife calls everyone outside for the fireworks (during which [[Browne]] sees the [[Yellow Sign]] formed by one of them, but the others do not), Bartlett recieves a frantic phone call from Nurse [[Price]] at the asylum, announcing the murder of [[Frederick Long]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the way home, [[Saunders]]&#039; cab is cut off by a black car and Saunders is threatened by [[the Tall Man]], who warns Saunders to tell his friends to &#039;drop this matter&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Audio Recording==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.tentaclesandunderpants.info/downloads/download.html;jsessionid=1orm91qo6l1al?id=14004 Audio Recording of the Second Session]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>192.168.0.2</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>